Requirement Gathering Questions for Maintenance Notification and Order Processing

Requirement Gathering Questions
1.1.1.1. Task Definition

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you plan the processing of a maintenance notification? Do you use tasks
during processing?

Explanation: Step-by-step processing of a notification using defined tasks.

A:

Q: 2) If you use notification tasks, give some examples.

A:

Q: 3) Who is responsible for performing a maintenance task?

Explanation: Who is involved? Which partner functions do they have? How are they
represented in the system?

A:

Q: 4) Do predefined follow-up tasks result automatically from completed tasks?

Explanation: In Customizing, you can define follow-up actions for tasks that are triggered
automatically for defined business operations. You can therefore define chains of follow-up
actions, which the system executes in order.

A:

Q: 5) Is there a set procedure for how you react to malfunctions?

Explanation: Define a response profile.

A:

Q: 6) Do you perform maintenance work with or without entering costs?

Explanation: If you do not enter costs for maintenance work in your organization, you can
use tasks to plan the individual processing operations, without having to use a maintenance
order.

A:

1.1.1.2. Notification Printing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you print notifications?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Q: 2) Provide some examples of the output format(s) for notifications.

1.1.1.3. Entry of Technical Findings

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment was
broken, damage, cause of damage) about a maintanence problem in order to create a
service history or to enable further evaluations?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Which technical data should be recorded and who is responsible?

A:

Q: 3) When do you document technical findings?

Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technically
completed?

A:

Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technical
information? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want to
have codes.

A:

1.1.1.4. Notification Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your specific archiving requirements.

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to archive notifications? If so, provide a copy of your document archiving
policy. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements.

A:

1.1.2. Order
1.1.2.1. Order Creation/Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What different types of maintenance do you have in your company (for example,
preventive maintenance, repair, installation)? Create a list of the maintenance types and
outline the differences in planning and execution.

A:


Q: 2) Mark in the following list whether maintenance tasks are performed by employees
and/or contractors.

A:

Q: 3) What information about labor resources (for example, availability and number of
people, duration of work, split of operation) do you require from the system when planning
maintenance orders?

A:

Q: 4) How do you proceed with an external assignment with the sub-contractor? Choose
one or more of the following options.

A:

Q: 5) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in a
single form?

A:

Q: 6) Will several technicians work on the same maintenance task?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you want to assign individual operations to particular people?

A:

Q: 8) Do you want to configure a special search help for partners in your order?

Explanation: For example, a search help for particular people (with particular qualifications),
which are assigned to a particular work center. For the partner function of type "Person", it is
possible to set an indicator for a special search help for partners.

A:

Q: 9) For which operation types do you want to represent the operation description using
service specifications?

A:

Q: 10) Do you want to define skills and/or qualifications for maintenance order operations?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you provide the technicians who perform the preventive maintenance with a list of
activities? If yes, how detailed are they?

A:

Q: 12) Do you use pre-defined task lists in work order planning?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 13) If yes, which of the following types of task lists do you require?

A:

Q: 14) Do you assign materials (spare parts) to work orders during the planning phase?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 15) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, daily
requirements, individual requirements)?

A:

Q: 16) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planning
phase?

A:

Q: 17) Do you want to generate purchase requisitions and reservations when the order is
created?

Explanation: You can configure whether reservations and purchase requisitions are
generated when the order is created or only when the order is released.

A:

Q: 18) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance order
during the planning phase?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 19) Do you want to generate collective purchase requisitions or individual purchase
requisitions for each external item?

A:

Q: 20) How do you want to plan special tools, documents and so on, which are required to
execute maintenance activities?

A:

Q: 21) Do you use work order permits, for example, to manage working conditions or safety
matters?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Q: 22) At what intervals do you want to schedule work (for example, daily, weekly,
monthly)?

A:

Q: 23) How do you want to prioritize work?

A:

Q: 24) At which level do you plan work (for example, for a shift, crew, skill, qualification, or
an individual person and so on)?

A:

Q: 25) How detailed is your planning (for example, usage backlog, capacity evaluation,
capacity scheduling)?

A:

Q: 26) Should the capacity load, which was formed for all the capacity types of the PP work
centers, be reduced for the duration of a maintenance task planned in a work order?

A:

Q: 27) Do you want to use paging in your company as an additional form of
communication?

A:

Q: 28) Do you use maintenance orders for processing investment measures? If yes, should
the asset under construction be created automatically or manually?

A:

Q: 29) Do you want the maintenance order to be integrated with one of the following
Controlling components?

A:
1.1.2.2. Material Planning

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Who performs material planning for orders in your company?

A:


A:

phase?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Is there an approval procedure for external purchase orders and material
withdrawals? If yes, describe it.

Explanation: Workflow, printing material withdrawal slips, signature rule.

A:

1.1.2.3. Order Permit

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard to
working conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.

A:

Q: 2) If yes, who in your company is authorized to issue permits?

Explanation: Maintenance of authorizations for the corresponding transactions.

A:

1.1.2.4. Order Release

Questions:

Q: 1) Who in your organization is allowed to release maintenance orders (for example,
maintenance planner, dispatcher)?

A:

Q: 2) Do you need to restrict the release until a process is completed or authorization
obtained? If yes, describe the process.

A:

Q: 3) Are there instances where orders should be released automatically?

Explanation: For example, for orders generated automatically from maintenance planning.

A:

1.1.2.5. Work Clearance Management

Questions:

Q: 1) What should be the relationship between the objects in Work Clearance Management
(order, work approval, work clearance application, work clearance document and so on)?

Explanation: Definition of a model at plant level (Customizing). A standard model and
enhanced model have already been predefined.

A:

Q: 2) Do conflicts exist between the conditions of different technical objects? Define these.

A:

Q: 3) Which different approval steps are required for your work clearance process?
Describe the concept or process flow of your approval process.

Explanation: Configuration or selection of the required status.

A:

Q: 4) Which employee is responsible for which types of approvals? Describe the
applications.

Explanation: Authorizations in Customizing.

A:

Q: 5) Which employee should be informed about which subject or object condition at which
time?

Explanation: Possible hierarchical display of permits and employees involved.

A:

Q: 6) Should the employees involved later in the approval process be informed
automatically of the progress of previous approval levels (Workflow)?

Explanation: Configure workflow.

A:

1.1.2.6. Order Printing

Questions:


Q: 1) Identify the internal papers that you require for the different people and order types
involved (for example, job ticket for employee, picking list).

A:

Q: 2) Provide some representative layout examples.

Q: 3) Do you assign printers to the people involved?

Explanation: Printers and shop papers can be assigned to specific users.

A:

1.1.2.7. Order Execution

Questions:

Q: 1) Note: This process is only for maintenance activities performed manually on technical
systems by the technician.

Explanation: This is only a note.

A:

Q: 2) How is material withdrawn for the order?

Explanation: Rough decription of process flow, the way in which the employee executing the
task obtains the necessary materials.

A:

Q: 3) Do you work with closed or open warehouses?

Explanation: Closed warehouses make it necessary to use material withdrawal slips,
whereas open warehouses do not. It may be that an approval procedure is required for
material withdrawal.

A:

Q: 4) Should the warehouse be informed of imminent material withdrawals using a material
availability slip?

A:

1.1.3. Capacity Planning
1.1.3.1. Capacity Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) Is it necessary to determine if a person is available to do a task? (If yes, consider
using employee shift scheduling.)

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to change capacity/work centers for periods with overload? (If yes,
consider changing the work center/assignment/activity dates manually from the evaluation
reports.)

A:

Q: 3) Do you do short term capacity planning? (If yes, ensure the time horizon for the
capacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period. If no, ensure the time horizon for the
capacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period.)

A:

Q: 4) Do you utilize your personnel resources/capacities per process or enterprise-wide? (If
yes, consider using work center hierarchies.)

A:

Q: 5) Are resources to be shared across departments (for example plant maintenance and
projects)?

Explanation: If yes, consider how you want to define the priorities between the departments
and make sure that you can use different order types at the work center.

A:

Q: 6) Which order type do you want to use for capacity evaluation?

A:
1.1.3.2. Capacity Dispatching and Leveling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you process the overload on capacities/wk centers? (If yes, you could use the
capacity leveling functions- dispatching and deallocating).

A:

Q: 2) Do you prefer to use a graphical planning tool for capacity leveling? (If yes, use the
graphical capacity planning tool If no, consider using the tabular capacity planning tool.)

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to assign available capacities to order operations?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 4) When you split order operations, do you want the system to create capacity loads
automatically for individual people?


Explanation: See the release note for 4.6C: "Automatic Creation of Employee Requirements
Records (Splits)".

A:

Q: 5) Which type of planning table do you want to use?

A:

Q: 6) Which planning strategies will you use for Sequencing?

A:
1.1.4. Modification of Technical Systems
1.1.4.1. Installation, Dismantling and Modification of Equipment

Questions:

Q: 1) Are installation operations in your company performed by your own technicians or
assigned externally?

A:

Q: 2) How are dismantling procedures performed at your company?

A:

Q: 3) Which components are exchanged?

A:

Q: 4) Are dismantled parts refurbished? If yes, describe the refurbishment process.

A:

Q: 5) Should a history be managed for the exchanged parts?

A:

Q: 6) Who documents the modification of a technical system and when?

Explanation: For example, the maintenance planner, maintenance engineer and so on.

A:

Q: 7) Do changes also have to be made to the system master during modification work?

Explanation: Reconcile with Asset Accounting.

A:

1.1.5. Material Movements
1.1.5.1. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Who posts the goods issue?

A:

Q: 2) How do you record materials issued from stores?

A:

Q: 3) How do you document materials supplied by the subcontractors?

A:

Q: 4) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post their
withdrawal in the system?

A:

Q: 5) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?

A:

Q: 6) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work
order?

A:

Q: 7) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

A:

Q: 8) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system

A:

Q: 9) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?


A:

Q: 10) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,
available stock, etc.)?

A:

Q: 11) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what
information do they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

A:

1.1.6. Completion Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you or your employees enter completion confirmations of time?

Explanation: Time completion confirmations can be entered using IW41 or alternatively, by
using CATS.

A:

Q: 2) Who confirms orders in your company?

A:

Q: 3) Are the completion confirmations in your company entered at the level of personnel
number?

Explanation: This function is required for CATS; it can be used with transaction IW41.

A:

Q: 4) Should the superior approve the times recorded by the employees?

Explanation: The permit function for completion confirmations is realized using CATS.

A:

Q: 5) Do you also want to confirm used material at the same time as the time confirmation?

Explanation: This function is limited using CATS, since it involves a jump to the goods issue
transaction in inventory management.

A:

Q: 6) Should the technical completion (for example, for breakdown times, causes of
damage, tasks and so on) be made at the same time as the time confirmation?


Explanation: The technical completion confirmation is part of the maintenance or service
notification. This can be created and saved using transaction IW41.

A:

Q: 7) Do you also want to enter measurement readings with the completion confirmation?

Explanation: Measurement documents can also be entered at the same time using
transaction IW41.

A:

Q: 8) Do you use the integration with the HR module?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you create completion confirmations centrally, or does each employee enter their
own times themselves?

Explanation: A central completion confirmation requires you to issue confirmation slips to
your employees. In some cases, it may also require you to configure the entry using different
orders and people in a screen template.

A:

Q: 10) Do you issue confirmation slips to your employees?

Explanation: Is required for the entry of a central completion confirmation. Requires print
settings (possibly SAPScript).

A:

Q: 11) How many times per day do your employees enter their working time?

Explanation: Important for the transfer frequency when using CATS.

A:

Q: 12) Will you use a Plant Data Collection (PDC) system for your completion
confirmations?

Explanation: On communication channel 3. Only completed time tickets can be confirmed
(time interval, duration), but no start/end times (stages).

A:

Q: 13) Do you enter the working times of contractors? If yes, how should the external
services be entered?


A:
1.1.6.1. Individual Time Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you enter the absolute duration or period of time (from...to)?

A:

Q: 2) Do you differentiate the times entered according to other activity types (for example,
to distinguish between normal work hours and overtime)?

Explanation: Reconcile with Controlling.

A:

Q: 3) Is the confirmation of your services person-based?

Explanation: If yes, is there a company agreement?

A:

Q: 4) In what unit and with what accuracy do you want to enter services?

A:

1.1.6.2. Overall Completion Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Which employees confirm which data?

Explanation: Configure a profile for the overall completion confirmation.

A:

Q: 2) Are internal services confirmed?

Explanation: Set overall confirmation profile.

A:

1.1.6.3. Time Sheet Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) In which systems do you track employee master data? Are wage rates only
maintained in the R/3 System or in other systems too?

A:

Q: 2) Do you use this data as a basis for indirect activity allocation to cost objects, cost
centers, internal orders and so on?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Explain how such a time sheet is structured today and how it should be structured in
future (what information do you need on the time sheet?).

A:

Q: 4) Does everyone who records working time have a personal number in HR? (If not,
CATS is not supported.)

Explanation: You require at least one HR mini master record before you can use CATS.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Which of your employees should fill out timesheets?

Explanation: Depending on the person entering the information, different time profiles can be
created. For example, an administrator can enter times for many employees.

A:

Q: 6) How do your employees enter and track working times?

A:

Q: 7) Are the labor costs calculated based on actual costs or standard rates?

A:

Q: 8) How do you determine these labor rates?

A:

Q: 9) Please explain the procedure, how employees in your company track and report time
today.

Explanation: For example, how do your developers in Research & Development determine
the time available for their projects: manually on paper, manually in Excel and so on?

A:

Q: 10) In which system do you want to run payroll?

A:


Q: 11) Are there special conditions for labor costs when employees work in different
countries or for different profit centers (for example, if an employee from the UK works on a
project in Germany)?

A:

Q: 12) Do you enter labor in complete hours or clock time?

A:

Q: 13) How do your employees enter trip costs? Are the trips linked to the recording of
working time? Describe in detail.

A:

Q: 14) Do you use the SAP employee reporting system?

A:

Q: 15) Identify the different categories of activity (activity types) that you use for estimation,
planning and settlement purposes?

A:

Q: 16) What are the various cost collectors, to which employees will charge time (for
example, cost centers, projects, internal orders)?

A:

Q: 17) Do sub-contractors and other third party labor sources have to enter work using
timesheets?

A:

Q: 18) Are these external services settled to a cost center or directly to the project?

A:

Q: 19) Do you record overtime?

A:

Q: 20) How is the cost of overtime calculated? Do you have different types of overtime (for
example, time and a half, double time)?

A:

Q: 21) Do you track indirect labor hours, such as vacation, sickness, holiday...? If yes,
define the categories you require and their entry type.

A:


Q: 22) Which financial entries do you currently make for your labor distribution?

A:

Q: 23) How do employees record their working time (time, detail, medium/system)?

A:

1.1.6.4. Time Sheet Permit

Questions:

Q: 1) What is your current timesheet approval strategy for employees and external
services?

Explanation: You can define the selection and layout.

A:

Q: 2) Explain the permit procedure for working time or recording of activity allocation for
your employees.

A:

Q: 3) Do you have an external reporting system for working times?

A:

Q: 4) How many employees does the person responsible for approval manage?

Explanation: Consider using the CATS workflow to automate the approval process.

A:

1.1.6.5. Forwarding of Time Sheet Data to PM

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transfer recorded activity allocations to Controlling using the time
sheet?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) How often does this transfer take place (daily, weekly and so on)?

A:

Q: 3) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,
employee hours by cost center)?

A:


1.1.6.6. Time Sheet Report

Questions:


A:

Q: 2) Do you need to see days that have not timesheet entries?

Explanation: There is a standard report for missing days.

A:

Q: 3) Do you need an evaluation, do see the days on which personnel enter more than a
defined number of hours?

Explanation: There is a standard report for overtime.

A:

Q: 4) Do you have to see the employee name in the documents for the receiving
component?

Explanation: Consider using a User Exit.

A:

Q: 5) Do different roles need to see different timesheet information? (If yes, create report
variants.)

A:

1.1.6.7. Service Entry Sheet

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to process or document completion of the services performed by the
service provider?

A:


Questions:

broken, damage, cause of damage) about a maintanence problem in order to create a
service history or to enable further evaluations?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


completed?

A:

have codes.

A:

1.1.6.9. Measurement Document Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you measure and record the current condition of your equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? Describe the different measuring points
and counters that you require for the different pieces of equipment.

A:

Q: 2) How do you proceed if a measurement reading lies outside of a pre-defined
measurement range?

A:

1.1.6.10. Measurement Document Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to archive measurement documents? If so,provide a copy of your
document archiving policy. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements.

A:

1.1.7. Settlement and Completion
1.1.7.1. Technical Order Completion

Questions:

Q: 1) Who decides whether the work is technically completed and when?

A:

1.1.7.2. Order Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Who settles orders in your company and when?

A:


Q: 2) How do you want to settle maintenance orders in general?

A:

Q: 3) How often and according to which rules do you want to settle orders ?

A:

Q: 4) Do you intend to set up a profit center analysis within your company?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you want to examine your cost elements for the settlement of orders in greater
detail?

A:

1.1.7.3. Business Order Completion

Questions:

Q: 1) Who decides whether the work is fully completed (business completion) and when?

A:

Q: 2) Which criteria do you use to decide whether work is fully completed?

A:

1.1.7.4. Order Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to archive orders? If so, please provide a copy of your document
archiving policy. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements.

A:

Q: 2) How long do you want to retain orders in the system before they are archived?

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to archive orders?

Explanation: You can archive orders with or without subsequent archiving.

A:

1.1.7.5. Historical Order - Entry

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you create historical orders to keep track of maintenance work that has already
been completed?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

1.1.8. Information System
1.1.8.1. Evaluations of Plant Maintenance Information System [PMIS]

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

A:

B. Organization
C.
D.
E. General Settings
F.
G.
H. Master Data
1. General Master Records
1.1. Material Master

Questions:

Q: 1) Which departments/organizational units are responsible for maintaining the material
data?

A:


Q: 2) Is master data common across all departments (common master data)?

A:

Q: 3) What is the default sales unit in sales processing and what are alternative sales
units?

A:

Q: 4) Which types of materials do you distinguish between (examples, accruals, quantity
structures)?

A:

Q: 5) How do these types differ regarding business processes (stock management,
procurement, sales, and so on), data maintained, and persons responsible?

A:

Q: 6) Do you group similar products together (for example, in divisions or material groups)?

A:

Q: 7) Do you maintain additional statuses for your materials (such as sales status)?

A:

Q: 8) If you have multiple plants, is your material normally supplied by a specific plant?

A:

Q: 9) Do you maintain additional types of grouping for other processes (for example, rebate,
statistics, commission or pricing)?

A:

Q: 10) Is the creation of a multi-level hierarchy necessary for materials (product hierarchy)?

A:

Q: 11) Do you record a minimum delivery quantity on your materials? If so, what happens
during sales order processing if a violation occurs?

A:

Q: 12) Are there materials that must be shipped in certain multiples (delivery units)?

A:

Q: 13) Do you record information on competitor products (sales support)?


A:

Q: 14) Can a material have different values in one plant? What are the criteria for the
different values?

A:

Q: 15) According to which criteria, does your material master data let you select with regard
to planned QM processes (for example, goods receipt inspection only for raw materials etc)?

A:

Q: 16) Do you maintain material-specific technical terms of delivery?

A:

Q: 17) Are the technical delivery terms stored online, and will you print these terms with
each purchase order?

A:

Q: 18) Do you require your vendors to provide quality certificates (certificates of
conformance or certificates of analysis) either prior to or with material shipments? Describe
the types of certificates you require.

A:

Q: 19) Do you require your vendors to provide samples for approval prior to actual delivery?
Please describe.

A:

Q: 20) Do you block a vendor invoice for payment until the quality inspection has been
successfully completed?

Explanation: Note: The block can be removed manually if required.

A:

Q: 21) Will you process recurring inspections for materials? (Note: This is only possible for
batch-managed materials). Please provide an example.

A:

Q: 22) How many different materials do you procure on a regular basis?

A:

Q: 23) Do you want to maintain a source list for the material types you will procure?

A:

Q: 24) Do you value your materials using a standard price, a moving average price, or
different valuation methods for different materials?

A:

Q: 25) Each material must belong to exactly one material group. Which material groups do
you need to organize your materials?

A:

Q: 26) Will you need to run MRP ?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 27) How many different G/L accounts do you need for inventory?

A:

Q: 28) Will you maintain specification data for your hazardous substances?

A:

Q: 29) Are separate material master records (perhaps with a separate material type or
numbering system) used in the development and engineering/design processes? How and
when are they converted to operational material number and type)?

A:

Q: 30) Do you use other systems (such as service management or costing) that need
material master records from R/3 and therefore a permanent interface?

A:

Q: 31) Describe the structure and numbering system for material numbers
(internal/external, specific to material type, other criteria).

A:

Q: 32) Which material types do you use (please complete): FERT, HALB, ROH, KMAT,
HAWA, FMHI, ...?

A:

Q: 33) Do you maintain multilingual descriptions for materials? Which languages are
relevant? How and when are they translated?

A:

Q: 34) What types of texts do you maintain for your materials?

A:

Q: 35) Please describe the process for creating and adding to material data. Include release
procedure/status, important sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities,
authorizations, involved systems, and so on.

A:

Q: 36) Describe the change process for materials.

Explanation: Please note your requirements regarding release procedure/status, important
sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities, authorizations, involved
systems, Engineering Change Management, revision levels, and so on.

A:

Q: 37) Which cross-plant and plant-specific material statuses are necessary?

A:

Q: 38) Do you need to customize the appearance of or add data fields to the material
master record (additional fields, customized material master, field selection, customer-
specific field checks)?

A:

Q: 39) Do you use classification for your material masters? For what reasons (storing
addition information, search functionality, or variant configuration)?

A:

Q: 40) Do you classify standardized parts by loading DIN classes and characteristic data
records?

A:

Q: 41) Do you have different valuation techniques (for example, standard versus moving
average)? If so, please explain which.

A:

Q: 42) Do you have inventory valued in different currencies at the same facility?

A:

Q: 43) Are your materials taxable?

A:

Q: 44) For a material is there a main delivery location for a sales department?

A:

Q: 45) PM/CS: Do you need a material master especially for plant maintenance / customer
service with reduced information (just basic data and classification data)?

A:

Q: 46) PM/CS: Do your maintenance or service equipment include major components that
you want to deal with individually to compile separate histories? If so, describe these
components.

A:

1.2. Material BOM

Questions:

Q: 1) In which context do you use bills of material?

A:

Q: 2) Do you need to use different BOMs for different applications, such as Production,
Engineering, Plant Maintenance, and Costing (BOM usage)?

A:

Q: 3) Do you use group BOMs for engineering/design and copy or assign them to plants at
implementation?

A:

Q: 4) What change management functions do you require? How do you want to define the
validity of BOMs (based on date/freely definable parameters)? Must existing change histories
be transferred to the R/3 System?

A:

Q: 5) Do you use other validity types (such as serial number, time period, or customer) in
addition to the "Valid from" date to control the validity of your BOM changes?

A:

Q: 6) Describe the change process for material BOMs.

Explanation: Please note your requirements regarding to release procedure/status,
notifications, responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, Engineering Change
Management, revision levels, synchronization with current production orders, and so on.

A:


Q: 7) Do you need a complete history of your BOM changes? For what reasons
(documentation, different technical states in operational areas, other)? For what types of
BOMs? From what point in time (initial released status, other)?

A:

Q: 8) Describe the process for creating and adding to material BOMs. Include release
procedure/status, notifications, responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, Engineering
Change Management, and so on.

A:

Q: 9) Describe the change process for material BOMs. Include release procedure/status,
notifications, responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, engineering change
management,revision levels, synchronization with current production orders, other.

A:

Q: 10) Do you want to use one BOM to represent several similar materials (closed variant
BOM)?

A:

Q: 11) Do you have several alternative BOMs for a material, depending on the
manufacturing procedure or lot size, for example (multiple BOM)?

A:

Q: 12) Do you have products with a large number of variants? Do you need Variant
Configuration?

A:

Q: 13) Which BOM maintenance functions do you require (copy functions, mass changes,
and so on)?

A:

Q: 14) What structure do your BOMs have? How many levels are there? How many
components are there on each level?

A:

Q: 15) Do your single-level BOMs represent production levels and do you keep your BOM
header materials in stock? If not, do you produce non-stock items, or are some assemblies
just used as structural elements in a BOM?

A:

Q: 16) Do you have different BOMs for a material in different plants?

A:


Q: 17) Which item categories (stock items, non-stock items, documents, texts) do you use?

A:

Q: 18) Do you use sub-items?

A:

Q: 19) Do you have recursive BOMs (the product contains a component with the same
material number as the superior assembly)?

A:


A:

Q: 21) Is an integration to external systems such as CAD systems or local PDM systems
needed to transfer BOM data to the R/3 System? Please define your requirements for
integration (online, batch, controlled redundancy, post-processing in R/3, other).

A:

Q: 22) If you use alternative items (one component can be replaced by another one), how
do you want one of several alternatives to be determined automatically?

A:

Q: 23) Do you require mass changes for BOM maintenance? Please explain.

A:

Q: 24) If you use alternative BOMs (several BOM structures exist parallel for the same
product at the same time), how do you want one of several alternatives to be determined
automatically (by production version, lot size, or time)?

A:

Q: 25) Do you produce co-products?

A:

Q: 26) Approximately how many finished products and assemblies (header materials with
BOMs) do you have?

A:

Q: 27) Explain for what purposes you use phantom assemblies.


Explanation: A phantom assembly is a logical (rather than functional) grouping of materials.
From a production point of view, these materials are not actually assembled to form a
physical unit.

A:

Q: 28) Do you plan and cost the scrap expected in production? Please explain.

A:

Q: 29) Do you produce co-products during the same process as the main product? (These
items are treated as material credit memos for costing and reduce manufacturing costs.)

A:

Q: 30) Lead time offset: Are all your components to be staged at the same time?

A:

1.3. Service Master

Questions:

Q: 1) Is it necessary for you to procure services from external suppliers? If so, do you want
to structure and manage these services? What kind of services do you procure?

A:

1.4. Batch
1.4.1. Batch Master

Questions:

Q: 1) General: Do you manage your materials in batches? In what areas (inventory
management, production, sales and distribution, warehouse management, quality
management) do you use batches?

A:

Q: 2) General: How many batches do you have in a particular period of time?

A:

Q: 3) General: Do you want to copy the batch numbers from your vendors into the SAP
System? Do you want this to be entered using a batch master record or a characteristic
(classification)?

A:

Q: 4) General: Which organizational area is responsible for batch management and
maintenance?

A:


Q: 5) Batch level: Do your batches have to be unique at a plant level, cross-plant at material
level or customer level?

A:

Q: 6) Batch level: Do you want some materials to be handled in batches in some plants and
not in others?

A:

Q: 7) Batch level: Do you transfer batches among different plants? Do you want the
transferred batch to be known in the receiving plant? (plant level or cross-plant level)

A:

Q: 8) Batch level: If it is cross-plant, is it possible that you must assign the same batch
number to different materials? (material level or customer level)

A:

Q: 9) Batch number: Do want the batch number to be assigned automatically or manually?
(internal and external number assignment)

A:

Q: 10) Batch number: Do want to automatically create batches for goods movement or for
the material you want to produce in the order?

A:

Q: 11) Batch number: Do you want to explain how your batch numbers are set up?

A:

Q: 12) Batch status management: Do you want to represent the usability of a batch using
batch status management?

A:

Q: 13) Batch status management: In what way are batches released and who is responsible
for their release?

A:

Q: 14) Batch status management: Do you have to manage the status of a batch as a cross-
storage location or a cross-stock type?

A:

Q: 15) Batch specifications: Do you want to describe the technical, physical and/or chemical
properties of a batch using characteristics and characteristic values?

A:

Q: 16) Batch specifications: Can you group certain materials based on a common
specification to classes?

A:

Q: 17) Batch specifications: When do you assign values to characteristics? Where does the
information for the value assignment come from? (for example, from the result summary in
QM)

A:

Q: 18) Batch determination: Do you need batch determination in order to find goods
movements from a warehouse that have a certain specification? In which areas (inventory ma
nagement, production, sales and distribution) do you use batch determination?

A:

Q: 19) Batch determination: What criteria do you want to use to find and sort the batches?
(batch-find strategy)

A:

Q: 20) Batch determination: Define a batch-find strategy in order to set which conditions
(criteria) you want to use to find batches.

A:

Q: 21) Batch determination: For performance reasons, it is recommended that some SAP
standard characteristics, such as deletion indicator or batch status, are included in th e
selection class,

A:

Q: 22) Batch where-used list: Do you want to document the path of a batch through the
enterprise using a batch where-used list? (for liability reasons)

A:

Q: 23) Active ingredient management: Do you want to manage materials with active
ingredients that are to be handled with batches?

A:

Q: 24) Active ingredient management: Do you have materials that have the amount of
active ingredients or fixed components managed in percent (%)?

A:


Q: 25) Active ingredient management: Do you have material that must be managed using
two different measuring units, such as ounces and grams? Is the relationship between them a
percent or can it be defined freely?

A:

Q: 26) Active ingredient management: Is the price based on the amount of ingredients? Do
you order raw materials in ingredient units of measure?

A:

Q: 27) Active ingredient management: Do you want to carry out a batch determination
based on ingredient amounts?

A:

Q: 28) Do you want to manage and track materials by batch? If yes, specify the materials
or groups of material.

A:

Q: 29) Do you want to manage and track materials by expiration date? If yes, specify the
materials or groups of material, also specify if you wish to see the total shelf life of the
material, or the remining shelf life.

A:

Q: 30) Do you have any materials where you keep track of the amount of active ingredients;
or percent solids?

A:

1.4.2. Batch Search Strategy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use batch materials in Sales and Distribution?

A:

Q: 2) Define the characteristics that are important when searching for a batch of a material,
such as color, weight, expiration date (selection class).

A:

Q: 3) When selecting material from batches that have met the criteria in the previous
question, what rules do you follow (FIFO or LIFO, quality, other)?

A:

Q: 4) When searching for a batch, what key information do you use (strategy type)?

A:


Q: 5) Do you need automatic or manual batch determination in Sales?

A:

Q: 6) Do you determine batches at order time or at delivery time?

A:

Q: 7) Does the material for a sales order have to be taken from only one batch, or are batch
splits allowed?

A:

1.5. Serial Numbers

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there serialized objects in your company? If so, which objects do you want to
serialize?

A:

Q: 2) Do you assign serial numbers to materials?

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to manage further information using serial numbers (for example, serial
numbers for equipment in maintenance or service) in addition to inventory management
information?

A:

Q: 4) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: is there a serial number to identify each
piece of equipment (from your production department and/or from the manufacturer)?

A:

Q: 5) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: If there are serial numbers, on which level
do you want to track history (include costing, statistics, and so on)?

A:

Q: 6) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: do you want to create your own serial
numbers, or do you use the manufacturer's serial number as a reference/key for that object?

A:

Q: 7) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your

vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).

A:

Q: 8) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?

A:

1.6. Handling unit

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

A:

Q: 2) Do you require that your customers send you pallet identification information?

A:

Q: 3) If you do not receive pallet identification information from your customers, do you
execute goods receipt processing based on pallets or material combinations?

A:

Q: 4) Are the pallets that are shown handled as a homogeneous unit using more than one
goods movement?

A:

Q: 5) Do you use pallet identification for production supply?

A:

Q: 6) Do you use picking and packaging functions with scanners (radio frequency)?

A:

Q: 7) Do you need traceability of materials based on pallet information?

A:

Q: 8) Do you use inspection lot processing on pallet basis?

A:

Q: 9) During quality checks, do you transport the pallets to other storage locations before
the usage decision?


A:

Q: 10) Do you need serial number management in the warehouse?

A:

Q: 11) Do you already have packaging requirements for you warehouse personnel? Are the
packaging requirements customer-based?

A:

Q: 12) Do you prepare raw materials for a production order on a scale and do you have to
ensure that exactly this material combination is used in the order?

A:

Q: 13) Do you want to control whether goods in the goods receipt zone are displayed in the
availability check?

A:

1.7. Work Center

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have different types of work centers and what are the differences between
them (e.g. labor work centers, machine work centers, production line)?

A:

Q: 2) To what other master data are your work centers linked (cost center etc.)?

A:

Q: 3) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you require
standard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)?

A:

Q: 4) Should default values be maintained in the work center, which can be transferred into
routings?

A:

Q: 5) Do you use a human resources management system? In what way is it used?

A:

Q: 6) Will you require capacity planning for your work centers/resources?

A:


Q: 7) Does every work center have a standard capacity or do you maintain shift intervals?

A:

Q: 8) Are work center hierarchies required for capacity evaluation?

A:

Q: 9) Are certain types of maintenance work always carried out by external contractors? If
so, please list and describe these types of maintenance work.

A:

Q: 10) PM/CS: In case of time-reported jobs, is contractors' work measured prior to
payment being made?

A:

Q: 11) PM/CS: Are the external resources planned?

A:

Q: 12) Are you going to be scheduling labor resources within your networks? (If yes, use
workcenters.)

A:

Q: 13) Will you be doing cost planning on networks? (If yes, you will need work centers.)

A:

Q: 14) Do you tend to plan labor resources at a department or individual level? (For both,
consider the work center capacity and HR assignment configuration requirements).

A:

Q: 15) It is possible to have a work center that includes both people and machines. Do you
have multiple uses for your work centers?

A:

Q: 16) The work center controls the formula for controlling scheduling. Do you have special
work center scheduling requirements?

A:

Q: 17) Work centers provide the basis for capacity planning. Do you want to manage
capacities for your projects?

A:


Q: 18) Will you be using PP and PS functionality? (If yes, carefully consider the integration
and processes between the PP and PS work centers for capacity planning.)

A:

1.8. Customer Master Record

Questions:

Q: 1) Which types of business partner do you have? For example, sole proprietor, legal
person, employees, foreign, other?

A:

Q: 2) How many active customers do you intend to transfer to your R/3 System?

A:

Q: 3) Which department(s) are responsible for the maintenance of customer data?

A:

Q: 4) If more than one department, describe the responsibilities of each?

A:

Q: 5) Describe your partner functions in detail.

Explanation: SAP partner functions are used to determine all possible functions that a
business partner can take on (for example, the ordering party - sold-to party, the recipient of
goods - ship-to party, and the party that has to pay - payer).

A:

Q: 6) Which partner functions are used for the different sales documents?

A:

Q: 7) Do your customers have multiple ship-tos and payers?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you maintain sales prospects?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you have one-time customers?

A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you have vendors who are also customers?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 11) Describe the structure of your current customer numbering scheme.

A:

Q: 12) Do you assign customers to industry sectors?

A:

Q: 13) Do you want to record any specific marketing information (for example, Nielsen IDs,
customer classification)?

A:

Q: 14) Do you group customers according to any of the following criteria?

A:

Q: 15) Will you record contact-person information on your customers?

A:

Q: 16) Does your customer allow you to combine different sales orders into one delivery?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 17) Does your customer allow partial deliveries?

A:

Q: 18) If you have multiple plants, is your customer normally supplied by a specific plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 19) Define your customer delivery priority levels and explain the assignment process.

A:

Q: 20) Are there special shipping conditions for your customer?

A:


Q: 21) Do you record foreign trade customers who are placed on an export control list to
possibly deny deliveries to them?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you use customer-specific calendars and/or goods receiving hours?

A:

Q: 23) What are your terms of payment for your customers?

A:

Q: 24) Are there any discounts linked to terms of payment, such as cash discounts?

A:

Q: 25) Do you have sales documents in foreign currencies? Describe how the exchange
rate is calculated.

A:

Q: 26) What kind of payments do you get from your customer?

A:

Q: 27) Are reminders sent? How long is the waiting period?

A:

Q: 28) What Incoterms will your customers use (for example, FOB, free domicile)?

A:

Q: 29) What texts do you maintain at a customer level?

A:

Q: 30) Which texts are used for the different sales documents (for sales, shipping, billing)?

A:

Q: 31) Describe any other information relevant to customers.

A:

Q: 32) Do you use the same structure of customer master records in all departments?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Q: 33) Do you ever need to block a customer for sales processing? If so, describe the
process in detail.

A:

Q: 34) How will you determine/select a customer for processing (matchcode)?

A:

Q: 35) Do you maintain customer data in an external system?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

1.9. Vendor Master Record

Questions:

Q: 1) What types of vendors do you have? (domestic, foreign, payment address, etc.)

A:

Q: 2) How many active vendors do you want to transfer to R/3?

A:

Q: 3) How do you want vendor numbers assigned in the R/3 System? Name your criteria for
manual and automatic number assignment. Describe the format of manually assigned vendor
numbers.

Explanation: Ways of assigning numbers: 1. Automatically by the R/3 System 2. Manually be
the user 3. Automatically and manually

A:

Q: 4) Do you have plants that supply materials or services to other plants in other company
codes?

A:

Q: 5) Do stock transport orders take place between stores or between the DC and store? If
so, for which sites?

A:

Q: 6) Do you want to reflect the organizational structure of your vendors in the R/3 System?

A:

Q: 7) Is it necessary for you to maintain different purchasing vendor master data for
different plants?

A:

Q: 8) When working with your suppliers, do you deal with people with different roles? If yes,
indicate the appropriate roles.

A:

Q: 9) Do you employ different payment terms by facility?

A:

Q: 10) Are there any vendor-specific instructions or information that you want to include in
purchasing documents?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 11) Do your vendors offer discounts for prompt payment (for example, 1% cash discount
within 10 days)? Provide a list of the payment terms you require.

A:

Q: 12) Do you specify foreign-trade-specific information in your purchasing documents
(such as CIF or FOB)? hose needed.

A:

Q: 13) Do you have vendors with several/different ordering addresses, payees, carriers,
and so on? If so, what do these depend on (assortment, supply region)?

A:

Q: 14) Do you need to maintain default data for the article master (such as planned delivery
time, purchasing group) at vendor level?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 15) Brazil only: Do you need a CGC/CPF check for vendors? If so, how do you want the
system to act (information message, warning, error message)?

A:

Q: 16) How many vendors regularly supply you with goods?

A:

Q: 17) Do you have vendors who are subject to withholding tax?

Explanation: Possibile to group with different account groups; Maintenance of fields in
master record. in master record.

A:

1.10. Bank/Bank Directory TR/FI

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to create the bank directory (address and control data for banks and post
office banks) manually or copy it automatically?

A:

Q: 2) Which banks and bank accounts will you be using for incoming and outgoing
payments?

A:

Q: 3) In what currencies are these accounts denominated?

A:

Q: 4) Are certain payments handled by more than one bank (correspondent
banks/intermediary banks)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

1.11. Taxes

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use an external Tax Package to determine the appropriate tax jurisdiction
and/or tax rates to apply to purchasing documents and/or vendor invoices? If yes, name the
external package.

A:

Q: 2) Will the tax jurisdiction codes be loaded into SAP?

A:

2. Production Planning and Procurement Planning
2.1. Sales and Operations Planning
2.1.1. Product Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have products to be grouped into product groups for planning (for example,
due to similar procurement methods or because they are manufactured on the same
bottleneck machine)?

A:


2.1.2. Rough-cut Planning Profile

Questions:

Q: 1) In medium to long-term planning do you use a rough-cut planning profile for resource
leveling?

A:

2.1.3. Information Structure

Questions:

Q: 1) Define your most important information structures

A:

2.1.4. Planning hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Define your most important planning hierarchies

A:

2.1.5. Planning Type

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require self-defined planning table views?

A:

2.1.6. Planning Event

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to define events in Sales and Operations Planning (SOP), so that their
influence on your planning is not derived from historical data?

A:

2.2. MRP/MPS/Long-Term Planning
2.2.1. BOM Explosion Number

Questions:

Q: 1) Must you enter a specific BOM explosion, which is valid up to a set date, for a
material, in the case of a multiple BOMs for example?

A:

2.2.2. Planning Calendar

Questions:


Q: 1) Do you want to define flexible period lengths for Production Planning and Material
Requirements Planning (for lot size determination and evaluation purposes for example)?

A:

2.2.3. Quota Arrangement

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific vendor quotas (for example 70 % from vendor A, 30% from
vendor B) for your materials? If yes, how many quota arrangements are you currently
maintaining?

A:

2.2.4. Production Lot

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have various manufacturing processes for an assembly and do you want to
calculate the costs of the various manufacturing processes separately and compare them
with each other?

A:

3. Procurement

Questions:


A:

3.1. Manufacturer Part Number

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain your vendor's part number within SAP, associated to your material
master number? If yes, could there be more than one manufacturers part number associated
with one of your material master numbers?

A:

3.2. Conditions

Questions:

Q: 1) Which price components do you use in purchasing documents (e.g. gross price,
surcharges, discounts, freight, duty, import)?

A:

Q: 2) Do prices depend on the quantity ordered (e.g. quantity discounts or price scales)? If
so, specify price components, quantity, and other factors.


A:

Q: 3) To which date does the price determination process relate? (E.g. delivery date, PO
date, other.)

A:

Q: 4) Is pricing information from other systems to be used for price computation purposes in
R/3?

A:

Q: 5) Do you manually change the price at header level for the entire purchasing
document?

A:

Q: 6) Do you allow changes to the gross price that is automatically determined by the R/3
System?

A:

Q: 7) Does the vendor's price include value-added tax?

A:

Q: 8) Is it possible to change pricing conditions after a PO has been created?

A:

Q: 9) Specifically for Brazil indexation: Which indexes and forms are necessary?

A:

3.3. Source List

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific vendor hierarchies?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to maintain a list of approved vendors? This means that if a material is
subject to a source list requirement, it can only be procured from the vendors included on the
source list.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you need a source list for: (1) all materials (2) all materials of a plant (3) certain
materials only? Please explain.


A:

Q: 4) Is there a fixed vendor for some materials? (1) No. (1) Yes, in certain plants (specify)
(2) Yes, across the entire enterprise (3) Yes, everywhere except in certain plants (specify).

A:

Q: 5) Do some vendors cover certain geogr. regions? (1) No. (2) Yes. Warning if vendor
does not cover relevant region. (3) Yes. Prevent issue of POs in latter case.
o

Explanation: Are some of your suppliers specific to a geographic region? Are some of your
suppliers specific to a geographic region? Example : ACME Widgets supplies plants in the
western region; ABC Widgets supplies plants in the eastern region. A western plant should
not order widgets from an eastern region supplier. not order widgets from an eastern region
supplier. (1) Do not need this feature. (2) Want this feature, warning only if vendor does not
cover the plant's region. (3) Want this feature, preventing orders from vendors that do not
cover a plant's region. a plant's region. If you want to use this feature, indicate the region to
which each of your plants belong.

A:

Q: 6) Should it be possible to for purchase orders to be created automatically in the course
of material requirements planning (MRP)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) Should it be possible to for scheduling agreement schedule lines to be created
automatically in the course of material requirements planning (MRP)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

3.4. Quota Arrangement

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific vendor quotas (for example 70 % from vendor A, 30% from
vendor B) for your materials? If yes, how many quota arrangements are you currently
maintaining?

A:

3.5. Delivery Address

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there addresses, over and above the plant address(es) that will be used
repeatedly on purchasing documents? If yes, provide a list of those needed.

A:


Q: 2) Do any storage locations have an address that varies from the assigned plant? If yes,
provide a list of the additional specific storage location addresses.

A:

3.6. Vendor Rebate Arrangements

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to send your business partners written confirmation of rebate
arrangements entered into with them?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you grant your vendors volume rebates based on the volume of business done
over a period of time?

A:

3.7. Settlement Accounting for Conditions Requiring Subsequent
Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is the data from the process of subsequent settlement to be included in the profitability
analysis?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Is the process of subsequent settlement to be carried out at plant level?

A:

Q: 3) At which levels is aggregation or sorting of data to be carried out?

A:

Q: 4) Must external business volume data (e.g. from sites with other systems) be taken into
account for subsequent (end-of-period rebate) settlement?

A:

Q: 5) Are tolerance limits to be taken into account in subsequent (end-of-period rebate)
settlement? If so, which?

A:

Q: 6) Are your business partners to be given written notification of rebate arrangements for
which settlement accounting has taken place?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) How long do your agreements run?

Explanation: Listing of the various intervals used Listing of the various intervals used

A:

Q: 8) What is the maximum period of an agreement with the settlement partner?

Explanation: For example, until cancelled or redefined annually. Note: You cannot map the
option "until cancellation" in the R/3 System by choosing "unending" rebate arrangement
(until 12.31.9999). See: Extending Rebate Arrangements Arrangements

A:

Q: 9) How many agreements do you use that have a validity period of more than one year?

A:

Q: 10) Which periods of time do you use that have a validity period of less than one year?

A:

Q: 11) Do you extend your agreements at regular intervals?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 12) If so, how often do you extend them?

A:

Q: 13) Do you use rebate arrangements that apply retrospectively?

Explanation: This can always only be done in exceptional cases!

A:

Q: 14) Do you carry out several settlements for each agreement?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 15) In the case of multiple settlement, do you use fixed time intervals that can be defined
beforehand in a calendar?

Explanation: In the case of fixed predefined time intervals, partial settlement is possible -
otherwise only interim settlement. Urgent recommendation: work with partial settlement only.

Reason: interim settlement is not a data retention level. It is not subsequently possible to
determine which document items were settled in which settlement run.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 16) At which time intervals will you carry out partial settlement with regard to a rebate
agreement?

Explanation: Maintenance of arrangement calendar.

A:

Q: 17) If you perform several settlements for each rebate arrangement: Do you perform a
final settlement in which all previous payments on account are taken into consideration?

Explanation: The sum of the partial settlement payments may exceed the rebate achieved at
the end of the rebate arrangement validity period.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 18) Do you settle up with regard to rebate arrangements only within a self-contained
accounting unit ("company code"), or are different volume rebates also settled for different
sub-enterprises in a single rebate arrangement and allocated proportionately?

Explanation: At this point, you should not underestimate the volume of documents.

A:

Q: 19) Do you settle rebate arrangements as credits or debits?

A:

Q: 20) Are settlements that are sent to customers (instead of vendors) also created based
on the business volume data from purchasing or agency business?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 21) Before which settlements do you agree on your business volume with your
settlement partners?

Explanation: For example, only before final settlement for a rebate arrangement or also
before the settlements before that, for example, mid-year settlements

A:

Q: 22) Do you want to post the settlement documents immediately in Financial Accounting?


Explanation: You can set a posting block so that settlements must be released in a separate
step. separate step.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 23) Do you receive promotional deals?

Explanation: Rebate based on business volume that is paid out at fixed intervals for defined
periods, for example. for example.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 24) Are subsequent settlement conditions to be taken into account for articles subject to
inventory management (valuation) on a value basis?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 25) When is the business volume updated?

A:

Q: 26) Which business-volume-relevant document types do you use?

A:

Q: 27) Which schema do you want to use to calculate conditions that are subsequently
settled? Which discounts are included in the business volume basis for subsequent
settlement, if necessary?

A:

Q: 28) Which discounts are included in the business volume basis for subsequent
settlement, if necessary?

A:

Q: 29) On which value does the business volume of subsequent settlement depend?

Explanation: Net value in the invoice, gross value in the purchase order, and so on Net value
in the invoice, gross value in the purchase order, and so on

A:

Q: 30) Are conditions calculated differently?

Explanation: Gross/net, different access sequence, and so on Gross/net, different access
sequence, and so on

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 31) Do you want to transfer business volume data from other systems to the R/3
System?

Explanation: Several tools are available for transferring legacy data: - Per File - Per pro-
forma vendor billing document

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 32) Do you want to import documents subject to volume-based rebates into the system
using a data carrier?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 33) Which evaluations and statistics do you need?

Explanation: For example, business volume and revenue at material group or article type
level type level

A:

3.8. Release Strategy with Classification

Questions:

Q: 1) Will any purchasing documents be subject to approval in SAP? If yes, describe the
criteria that will be needed to determine the appropriate approval policy for purchase
requisitions, RFQs, purchase orders, contracts, scheduling agreements.

A:

3.9. Vendor Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you evaluate vendors in your legacy system?

A:

Q: 2) Which criteria do you use to evaluate your vendors?

A:

Q: 3) How do you rate the scores for these criteria? If the criteria are not weighted equally,
indicate the individual weightings.

A:


4. Production
4.1. Discrete Production
4.1.1. Production Version

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require production versions that define materials, with which alternative BOMs
or with which task lists/master recipes

A:

4.1.2. Work Center
4.1.2.1. Work Center

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have different types of work centers and what are the differences between
them (e.g. labor work centers, machine work centers, production line)?

A:

Q: 2) To what other master data are your work centers linked (cost center etc.)?

A:


A:

Q: 4) Should default values be maintained in the work center, which can be transferred into
routings?

A:

Q: 5) Do you use a human resources management system? In what way is it used?

A:

Q: 6) Will you require capacity planning for your work centers/resources?

A:

Q: 7) Does every work center have a standard capacity or do you maintain shift intervals?

A:

Q: 8) Are work center hierarchies required for capacity evaluation?

A:

4.1.2.2. Capacity


Questions:

Q: 1) Which capacity categories will you require (for example, labor, machine, process
unit)?

A:

Q: 2) Will you use pooled capacities (for example, energy, flexible labor groups)?

A:

4.1.2.3. Shift Sequence

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you require in addition to the standard capacity a more precise capacity? If yes,
define your shifts and intervals.

A:

4.1.3. Routing
4.1.3.1. Routings

Questions:

Q: 1) For which business processes do you require routings?

A:

Q: 2) Do you have different production methods for the same material (e.g. dependent on
the lot size)? Are there several routing alternatives for one material?

A:

Q: 3) Do you require parallel or alternative sequences of operations within a routing?

A:

Q: 4) Do you want to schedule the routings in order to determine the dates for all
operations?

Explanation: Scheduling without reference to an order detemines the in-house production
time of a material, which you can then compare with the lot-size-dependent in-house
production time from the material master.

A:

Q: 5) Should capacity requirements be created for the operations?

A:

Q: 6) Do you have operations for which you envisage external processing, that is that your
vendor will process?

A:



A:

Q: 8) Which objects do you want to allocate to the operations?

A:

Q: 9) Do you want inspection operations in your routings?

A:

Q: 10) Will you require special user-defined fields in your routing for information and printing
purposes?

A:

Q: 11) Do you require standardized long texts for the operations (standard text keys)?

A:

Q: 12) What requirements are there regarding change management? How should the
validity be defined (based on date or freely definable parameters)? Will existing change
histories have to be transferred to the R/3 system?

A:

Q: 13) What requirements do you have regarding routing management (copy functions,
mass changes etc.)?

A:

Q: 14) Will you be measuring quality during the production process?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.1.3.2. Reference Operation Set

Questions:

Q: 1) Are sequences of operations used that remain constant, and which should be used as
templates (reference operation sets)?

A:

4.1.3.3. Production Resources and Tools

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain production resources/tools that are used during the processing of
your materials?

A:


Q: 2) What kind of production resources/tools do you require?

A:

Q: 3) Do you require inventory management for your production resources/tools?

A:

4.1.3.4. Standard Trigger Point

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you require trigger points ( such as all subsequent processes to be released up
to final point , all immediate process to be released etc.)?

A:

Q: 2) What functions will you want trigger points to perform?

A:

Q: 3) What system status do you want to you use?

A:

Q: 4) Will you use trigger points to generate rework orders/ standard operations ?

A:

Q: 5) Will you create trigger point groups with standard triggers?

A:

4.1.4. CAPP Standard Values Calculation
4.1.4.1. CAPP Formula

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you want to calculate your standard values with given formulas and methods?

A:

4.2. Repetitive Manufacturing

Questions:


A:

4.2.2. Product Cost Collectors


Questions:

Q: 1) If you are working with period-based controlling, do you want to have one cost
collector for each production method or for each material?

A:

4.2.3. Planning ID

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to use the planning ID to group materials for planning and evaluation?

A:

4.2.4. Line Design
4.2.4.1. Rate Routing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:

operations?


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

purposes?

A:


A:


A:

mass changes etc.)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.2.4.2. Reference Rate Routing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are sequences of operations used that remain constant, and which should be used as
templates (reference operation sets)?

A:

4.2.4.3. Line Hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use line balancing, tact-based scheduling or sequencing?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to represent the structure of a production line (line segment, processing
stations and so on) in a hierarchy?

A:


4.3. Process Manufacturing

Questions:


A:

4.3.2. Resource
4.3.2.1. Resource

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use different resource categories and what will be the differences between
them (for example, labor resources, storage resources, processing units)?

A:

Q: 2) Will you produce, for example, in a tank, and will you then store the finished product in
this tank until delivery (storage resources)?

A:

Q: 3) What functions shall be fulfilled by your resources? How will you use resources
(scheduling, capacity, costs, etc.)?

A:

Q: 4) Do you have resources that you will allocate to the process order on short notice
(classification, resource selection)?

A:

Q: 5) With which other objects will resources be linked (cost center, qualification, etc.)? Will
there be a link to the Human Resources Management system?

A:

Q: 6) Which standard values will you use (for example, labor time, machine time, setup
time)?

A:

Q: 7) Will special formulas be required for certain resources for scheduling, capacity
requirements planning, and cost determination?

A:

Q: 8) Do you want default values to be defined in the resource for the master recipe?

A:


Q: 9) Will each resource have a standard available capacity or do you want shift intervals to
be maintained?

A:

Q: 10) Do you need resource hierarchies for capacity evaluation purposes?

A:

Q: 11) Will there be restrictions regarding material flow through processing units that can be
visually reproduced using a sequence definition or a network?

A:

4.3.2.2. Capacity

Questions:

Q: 1) Which capacity categories will you require (for example, labor, machine, process
unit)?

A:

Q: 2) Will you use pooled capacities (for example, energy, flexible labor groups)?

A:

4.3.2.3. Shift Sequence

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you require in addition to the standard capacity a more precise capacity? If yes,
define your shifts and intervals.

A:

4.3.3. Master Recipe
4.3.3.1. Master Recipe

Questions:

Q: 1) How many different master recipes will you need?

A:

Q: 2) What will you use recipes for?

A:

Q: 3) Will you have several alternative recipes for one material (for example, depending on
the lot size) and do you want these to be combined (recipe group)?

A:

Q: 4) Will you use one recipe to produce different materials?


A:

Q: 5) Do you use formulas to calculate the quantities of the components (material quantity
calculation)? Do you want characteristic values such as concentration to be taken into
account?

A:

Q: 6) Which control recipe destinations will you need?

A:

Q: 7) If the control recipe destination is a person/group of people, which areas (weighing,
quality inspection, production, etc.) will be affected? Do you want to represent this logical
distribution according to user department or using material flow?

A:

Q: 8) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of changes? How do
you want the validity of the recipe to be defined?

A:

Q: 9) Will you require an approval procedure to change recipes? Will a digital signature be
required (change request/order)?

A:

Q: 10) Which relationships will exist between the phases within a recipe?

A:

Q: 11) Do you want the operations/phases to create capacity requirements?

A:

Q: 12) Are the operations/phases be relevant for the calculation?

A:

Q: 13) Which type of processing do you want to be possible for operations?

A:

Q: 14) Which standard values will you use for the operations (for example, labor time,
machine time, setup time)?

A:

Q: 15) Will all phases be subject to confirmation?

A:


Q: 16) Will you use milestone confirmations?

A:

Q: 17) Which process instructions will you need?

A:

Q: 18) Will special user fields be required in the master recipe for information and printing
purposes?

A:

Q: 19) Besides the actual processing unit, will further resources be allocated to an operation
(secondary resources) that are, for example, only used for a limited time (for example, labor,
transportation trucks)? Do you want them to be relevant for confirmation

A:

Q: 20) Which objects will be allocated to the phases (for example, components, production
resources/tools)?

A:

Q: 21) Will temporary materials (INTRA) with separate material numbers be produced
during the production process that will be processed further immediately instead of being
delivered to storage?

A:

Q: 22) Will you carry out in-process quality inspections, (assigning inspection characteristics
to phases)?

A:

Q: 23) Should the recording of inspection results be carried out in QM? Or should it be dealt
with in the PI-Sheet (either by a QM-Jump or by sending the information via the process
message)?

A:

Q: 24) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of master recipes
(copy function, mass changes, etc.)?

A:

4.3.3.2. Production Resources and Tools

Questions:

your materials?


A:


A:


A:

Q: 4) Do you want to manage your production resources/tools by quantity alone or also
based on localization, value, responsible person etc.?

A:

Q: 5) Do you use production resources/tools which have to be checked or calibrated
regularly?

A:

Q: 6) QM: List any external equipment or gauges which will be used to capture results or
defects and transfer to the R/3 System.

A:

4.4. KANBAN
4.4.1. Supply Area

Questions:

Q: 1) Define supply areas, which serve as temporary warehouses in Production, in order to
directly stage material for production in the work center.

A:

4.4.2. Control Cycle

Questions:

Q: 1) If you use KANBAN, you must determine the relationship between the demand and
supply source. Define your control cycles!

A:

Q: 2) Which replenishment strategies will you use?

A:

Q: 3) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for in-house production?

A:

Q: 4) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for external procurement?

A:

Q: 5) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for stock transfer?

A:

Q: 6) Do you want to use the automatic kanban calculation to ensure optimal settings,
regular checks and adjustments to the control variables (number of kanbans and material
quantity per kanban)?

A:

5. Sales and Distribution
5.1. Business Partner
5.1.1. Customer hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to group sales to customers into various levels for reporting purposes?

A:

Q: 2) In your current organizational structure, do you need to analyze purchases by
customer group?

A:

Q: 3) List reports and give examples.

A:

Q: 4) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterprise
and allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structures
within your customers' enterprises?

A:

5.2. Products
5.2.1. Material determination

Questions:

Q: 1) If you use special packaging for different occasions, such as, Thanksgiving), do you
want the system to automatically substitute the special packaging when the product is
ordered?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes, how does substitution take place, that is on which master data fields do you
base your substitution?

A:

Q: 3) Why would you substitute one product for another or one packaging for another?

A:

Q: 4) Do you want product substitution to occur only when the original ordered product is
not available?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you want the substituted product to be listed as a sub-item of the originally ordered
product, or should the substituted product completely replace the original product?

A:

Q: 6) Do you want to print product information for the original or the substitute product in the
output?

A:

Q: 7) Do you want product substitution to occur automatically, or should data entry
personnel be offered a selection screen containing substitutable products?

A:

5.2.2. Item proposal

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use a process to simplify order entry for customers that regularly order the
same product or group of products?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes, please describe this process in detail.

A:

5.2.3. Dynamic product proposal

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need automatic product proposal specific to your customer during sales order
processing?

A:

Q: 2) Which information sources do you need to determine product proposals dynamically?

A:

Q: 3) Do you need to display a monthly, weekly, or daily sales order history?


A:

Q: 4) Do you want to create dynamic product proposals online or in the background?

A:

5.2.4. Cross Selling

Questions:

Q: 1) During your telesales activities, do you want to inform customers about additional
products to the one they are ordering (for example, accessories)?

A:

Q: 2) What is your cross-selling policy based on?

A:

Q: 3) Do you create cross-selling lists online or in the background?

A:
5.2.5. Material Listing /Material Exclusion

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you offer specific materials to certain customers (material listing)? If yes, describe
this process in detail.

Explanation: Do you apply certain items/materials to selected customers (material listing)? If
yes, describe this process in detail.

A:

Q: 2) What are your selection criteria for material listing?

A:

Q: 3) Do you exclude customers from ordering certain products (material exclusion)? If yes,
describe the process in detail.

A:

Q: 4) What are your selection criteria for material exclusion?

A:

5.2.6. Value Contract Assortment module

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you determine which materials are permitted for value contracts (standard
material, product hierarchy, assortment)?

A:

5.2.7. Product allocation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you limit the quantity of an item that you sell to a customer (product allocation)?

A:

Q: 2) How do you allocate (by customer, geographic area, material)?

A:

5.3. Assortment
5.3.1. Assortment Module Maintenance

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you refine the results from listing by using assortment levels?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

5.3.2. Product proposal processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Is your material master data to be structured to administer price catalogs for
customers?

A:

5.3.3. Assortment-Assortment User Assignment Maintenance

Questions:

Q: 1) Are you a wholesaler?

Explanation: It is only good business practice to define customer assortments if you are a
wholesaler.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you have particular customer assortments for your wholesale customers?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Can customers only order materials listed in their particular assortment?

Explanation: It is only good business practice to define customer assortments if you are a
wholesaler. are a wholesaler.


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

5.4. Agreements
5.4.1. Customer material information

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you allow shipping data to be maintained for a specific customer-material
combination (for example, plant, delivery priority, minimum delivery quantity)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you have under or overdelivery tolerances for certain combinations of customer
and material?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Do your customers place orders using their own material numbers?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you define material descriptions for specific customers?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

5.4.2. Rebate Agreement

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your how you process rebates.

A:

Q: 2) What are your rebates based on (for example, customer, material)?

A:

Q: 3) Do you manage accruals for rebates?

A:

Q: 4) What type of rebates do you offer (for example, volume, quantity, lump sum)?

A:

Q: 5) Do you define validity periods for rebates?

A:

5.4.3. Marketing campaigns

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you group marketing deals into marketing plans? If yes, please describe in detail.

A:

Q: 2) Do you offer marketing deals on your products to customer (one-time discounts)?

A:

Q: 3) Are these deals customer specific or are they related to the product?

A:

Q: 4) Are special payment terms given with sales deals?

A:

Q: 5) Do you assign a budget maintained by CO profitability analysis for promotion on
sales?

A:

Q: 6) Do you monitor the budget process?

A:

5.4.4. Price Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you manage price catalogs?

A:

5.5. Conditions

Questions:

Q: 1) Which general methods of price determination do you use (e.g. list price with
discounts, surcharges)?

A:

Q: 2) Which price types do you use, what are your criteria, and how do you compute them?

A:

Q: 3) Do you work with surcharges? If so, which types of surcharge and criteria do you use
and how is the calculation carried out?

A:

Q: 4) Do work with discounts? If so, what kind of discounts and criteria do you use and how
is the calculation carried out?

A:

Q: 5) Which prices, surcharges, discounts, and freight costs apply to the whole document
and which apply to the item level only?

A:

Q: 6) Are manual changes to price conditions allowed in your enterprise?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) Do work with freight costs? If so, what kinds of freight costs and criteria do you use

A:

Q: 8) Do you work with taxes? If so, which types of tax and criteria do you use and how is
the calculation carried out?

A:

Q: 9) Do work with discounts in kind? If so, what kinds of discount in kind do you use?

A:

Q: 10) Do you document your price units?

A:

Q: 11) Must the R/3 System access information stored in another system (external or
internal) in order to calculate a price?

A:

Q: 12) Does the same pricing structure apply to all order types?

A:

Q: 13) What date is the pricing based on?

A:

Q: 14) Do you work with commissions (e.g. for sales personnel, carriers/forwarders)?

A:


Q: 15) Which pricing information do you record for statistical purposes (without changing
the price)? For example, material costs, profit margins, or sub-totals printed on invoices.

A:

Q: 16) Do you wish to pass on pricing information to CO-PA (Profitability Analysis)?

A:

Q: 17) If you process orders using EDI, do you accept the expected order price per item or
the expected order value?

A:

Q: 18) If you process cross-company orders, do you calculate these based on a specified
amount or on a percentage of the price per piece?

A:

Q: 19) Do you use "interval scales" for price determination purposes?

A:

Q: 20) Is the system to cumulate the amounts for certain conditions (e.g.discounts) and de-
activate the discount once a specified maximum value has been reached (tracking cumulative
values)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 21) Do you have multiple prices and discounts for a customer and require the system to
search the combination of all eligible prices and discounts and give the customer the "best" or
"lowest" price?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 22) Do your prices include sales tax?

A:

Q: 23) Do you need to determine prices based on the variant configuration results? For
example, when selling an automobile, options for number of doors, color, engine size, and
music system help determine the price to be charged.

A:

Q: 24) Do you use an external tax package?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Q: 25) Do you carry out a price determination process for projects with make-to-order
production?

A:

Q: 26) Describe all other combinations.

A:

Q: 27) On which master data combinations do you base your pricing?

A:

Q: 28) How are the pricing conditions specified (e.g. quantity, percentage, scales, fixed
values)?

A:

Q: 29) Which reports and analyses do you need for price determination purposes?

A:

Q: 30) What criteria should be maintained for conditions (country, customer group, and so
on)?

A:


A:

Q: 32) Do you base the price of an item on the production cost or the cost of purchase of
the material?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

5.6. Output

Questions:

Q: 1) What master data fields do you use to determine what output to send?

A:

Q: 2) What type of output do you send (e.g. Paper, Fax, EDI, Internet)?

A:

Q: 3) When is output sent?

A:

Q: 4) Collect print out (samples) of the required documents/messages (e.g. order
confirmation, pick list, packing list, invoice).

A:

Q: 5) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

A:

Q: 6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

A:

Q: 7) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

A:

Q: 8) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

A:

Q: 9) How should shipment documents be transmitted?

A:

Q: 10) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

A:

Q: 11) How should foreign trade documents be transmitted?

A:

5.7. Transport
5.7.1. Routes/Stages

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need routes as selection criteria for deliveries?

A:

Q: 2) Do you use the transportation functionality?

A:

5.7.2. Route schedule

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan weekly customer deliveries from a shipping point to different goods
recipients and their unloading points in a route (route schedule)?


A:

5.7.3. Transportation connection point

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use stages/transportation connection points in order to refine your
transportation handling (freight costs, time scheduling, output, etc.)?

A:

6. Inventory Management, Warehouse Management
and Transportation

6.1. Hazardous Material

Questions:

Q: 1) Are your hazardous materials administered at just one or several storage locations?

A:

6.2. Batch

Questions:

Q: 1) General: Do you manage your materials in batches? In what areas (inventory
management, production, sales and distribution, warehouse management, quality
management) do you use batches?

A:

Q: 2) General: How many batches do you have in a particular period of time?

A:

Q: 3) General: Do you want to copy the batch numbers from your vendors into the SAP
System? Do you want this to be entered using a batch master record or a characteristic
(classification)?

A:

Q: 4) General: Which organizational area is responsible for batch management and
maintenance?

A:

Q: 5) Batch level: Do your batches have to be unique at a plant level, cross-plant at material
level or customer level?

A:


Q: 6) Batch level: Do you want some materials to be handled in batches in some plants and
not in others?

A:

Q: 7) Batch level: Do you transfer batches among different plants? Do you want the
transferred batch to be known in the receiving plant? (plant level or cross-plant level)

A:

Q: 8) Batch level: If it is cross-plant, is it possible that you must assign the same batch
number to different materials? (material level or customer level)

A:

Q: 9) Batch number: Do want the batch number to be assigned automatically or manually?
(internal and external number assignment)

A:

Q: 10) Batch number: Do want to automatically create batches for goods movement or for
the material you want to produce in the order?

A:

Q: 11) Batch number: Do you want to explain how your batch numbers are set up?

A:

Q: 12) Batch status management: Do you want to represent the usability of a batch using
batch status management?

A:

Q: 13) Batch status management: In what way are batches released and who is responsible
for their release?

A:

Q: 14) Batch status management: Do you have to manage the status of a batch as a cross-
storage location or a cross-stock type?

A:

Q: 15) Batch specifications: Do you want to describe the technical, physical and/or chemical
properties of a batch using characteristics and characteristic values?

A:

Q: 16) Batch specifications: Can you group certain materials based on a common
specification to classes?


A:

Q: 17) Batch specifications: When do you assign values to characteristics? Where does the
information for the value assignment come from? (for example, from the result summary in
QM)

A:

Q: 18) Batch determination: Do you need batch determination in order to find goods
movements from a warehouse that have a certain specification? In which areas (inventory ma
nagement, production, sales and distribution) do you use batch determination?

A:

Q: 19) Batch determination: What criteria do you want to use to find and sort the batches?
(batch-find strategy)

A:

Q: 20) Batch determination: Define a batch-find strategy in order to set which conditions
(criteria) you want to use to find batches.

A:

Q: 21) Batch determination: For performance reasons, it is recommended that some SAP
standard characteristics, such as deletion indicator or batch status, are included in th e
selection class,

A:

Q: 22) Batch where-used list: Do you want to document the path of a batch through the
enterprise using a batch where-used list? (for liability reasons)

A:

Q: 23) Active ingredient management: Do you want to manage materials with active
ingredients that are to be handled with batches?

A:

Q: 24) Active ingredient management: Do you have materials that have the amount of
active ingredients or fixed components managed in percent (%)?

A:

Q: 25) Active ingredient management: Do you have material that must be managed using
two different measuring units, such as ounces and grams? Is the relationship between them a
percent or can it be defined freely?

A:


Q: 26) Active ingredient management: Is the price based on the amount of ingredients? Do
you order raw materials in ingredient units of measure?

A:

Q: 27) Active ingredient management: Do you want to carry out a batch determination
based on ingredient amounts?

A:

Q: 28) Do you want to manage and track materials by batch? If yes, specify the materials
or groups of material.

A:

Q: 29) Do you want to manage and track materials by expiration date? If yes, specify the
materials or groups of material, also specify if you wish to see the total shelf life of the
material, or the remining shelf life.

A:

Q: 30) Do you have any materials where you keep track of the amount of active ingredients;
or percent solids?

A:

6.3. Batch Search Strategy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use batch materials in Sales and Distribution?

A:

Q: 2) Define the characteristics that are important when searching for a batch of a material,
such as color, weight, expiration date (selection class).

A:

Q: 3) When selecting material from batches that have met the criteria in the previous
question, what rules do you follow (FIFO or LIFO, quality, other)?

A:

Q: 4) When searching for a batch, what key information do you use (strategy type)?

A:

Q: 5) Do you need automatic or manual batch determination in Sales?

A:


Q: 6) Do you determine batches at order time or at delivery time?

A:

Q: 7) Does the material for a sales order have to be taken from only one batch, or are batch
splits allowed?

A:

6.4. Control Cycle

Questions:

Q: 1) If you use KANBAN, you must determine the relationship between the demand and
supply source. Define your control cycles!

A:

Q: 2) Which replenishment strategies will you use?

A:

Q: 3) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for in-house production?

A:

Q: 4) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for external procurement?

A:

Q: 5) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for stock transfer?

A:


A:

6.5. Serial Numbers

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there serialized objects in your company? If so, which objects do you want to
serialize?

A:

Q: 2) Do you assign serial numbers to materials?

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to manage further information using serial numbers (for example, serial
numbers for equipment in maintenance or service) in addition to inventory management
information?

A:

Q: 4) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: is there a serial number to identify each
piece of equipment (from your production department and/or from the manufacturer)?

A:

Q: 5) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: If there are serial numbers, on which level
do you want to track history (include costing, statistics, and so on)?

A:

Q: 6) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: do you want to create your own serial
numbers, or do you use the manufacturer's serial number as a reference/key for that object?

A:


your vendors).

A:

check result?

A:

7. Customer Service
7.1. Business Partner
7.1.1. Customer Hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to group sales to customers into various levels for reporting purposes?

A:

Q: 2) In your current organizational structure, do you need to analyze purchases by
customer group?

A:

Q: 3) List reports and give examples.

A:

7.2. Rebate Arrangements
7.2.1. Customer Material Information

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you allow shipping data to be maintained for a specific customer-material
combination (for example, plant, delivery priority, minimum delivery quantity)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you have under or overdelivery tolerances for certain combinations of customer
and material?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Do your customers place orders using their own material numbers?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you define material descriptions for specific customers?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

7.2.2. Conditions

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

values)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

"lowest" price?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

production?

A:


A:


A:

values)?

A:


A:

Q: 30) What criteria should be maintained for conditions (country, customer group, and so
on)?

A:


A:

the material?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

7.3. Products
7.3.1. Material Master: Service Product

Questions:

Q: 1) Which departments/organizational units are responsible for maintaining the material
data?

A:

Q: 2) Is master data common across all departments (common master data)?

A:

Q: 3) What is the default sales unit in sales processing and what are alternative sales
units?

A:

Q: 4) Which types of materials do you distinguish between (examples, accruals, quantity
structures)?


A:

Q: 5) Do you group similar products together (for example, in divisions or material groups)?

A:

Q: 6) Do you maintain additional statuses for your materials (such as sales status)?

A:

Q: 7) If you have multiple plants, is your material normally supplied by a specific plant?

A:

Q: 8) Is the creation of a multi-level hierarchy necessary for materials (product hierarchy)?

A:

Q: 9) Do you record a minimum delivery quantity on your materials? If so, what happens
during sales order processing if a violation occurs?

A:

Q: 10) Are there materials that must be shipped in certain multiples (delivery units)?

A:

Q: 11) Can a material have different values in one plant? What are the criteria for the
different values?

A:


A:

Q: 13) Describe the structure and numbering system for material numbers
(internal/external, specific to material type, other criteria).

A:

Q: 14) Which material types do you use (please complete): FERT, HALB, ROH, KMAT,
HAWA, FMHI, ...?

A:

Q: 15) Do you maintain multilingual descriptions for materials? Which languages are
relevant? How and when are they translated?

A:

Q: 16) What types of texts do you maintain for your materials?

A:

Q: 17) Please describe the process for creating and adding to material data. Include release
procedure/status, important sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities,
authorizations, involved systems, and so on.

A:

Q: 18) Describe the change process for materials.

Explanation: Please note your requirements regarding release procedure/status, important
sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities, authorizations, involved
systems, Engineering Change Management, revision levels, and so on.

A:

Q: 19) Which cross-plant and plant-specific material statuses are necessary?

A:

Q: 20) Do you need to customize the appearance of or add data fields to the material
master record (additional fields, customized material master, field selection, customer-
specific field checks)?

A:

Q: 21) Do you use classification for your material masters? For what reasons (storing
addition information, search functionality, or variant configuration)?

A:

7.4. Technical Objects (Structuring of Technical Systems)

Questions:

Q: 1) How should the technical systems of your customers be structured?

Explanation: Which components should be represented as functional locations, pieces of
equipment, assemblies and so on? Are bills of material required to represent the structure of
the technical system? For detailed questions about the structuring of technical systems, see
the relevant technical objects.

A:

Q: 2) What kinds of technical objects do you handle in your service?

A:


Q: 3) How is information about technical objects organized and stored in your company (for
example, via EDV, file cards or no information at all)?

A:

7.4.1. Functional Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you usually have several technical objects for a customer that you want to
represent together? Do you require additional functionality to structure this accordingly?

A:

Q: 2) If yes, which technical objects from customer sites should be combined using
functional locations?

A:

Q: 3) What do the hierarchy levels of the functional locations represent (for example, cost
center levels, production process levels)?

A:

Q: 4) Is the hierarchy for functional locations structured according to spatial, functional or
technical viewpoints?

A:

Q: 5) How detailed should the functional location hierarchy be (for example, number of
levels, installation and dismantling of equipment)?

A:

Q: 6) At what level(s) of the hierarchy should data be entered?

A:

Q: 7) How detailed should the last level of the hierarchy for functional locations be?

A:

Q: 8) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change (for
example, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)?

A:

Q: 9) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a) from
a procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)?

A:

Q: 10) How should the different levels be linked together with regard to the transfer of data?

A:

Q: 11) Do you need to link documents to functional locations?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring
points and counters?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 13) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


your vendors).

A:

check result?

A:

Q: 16) Do you classify functional locations? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that
are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.

A:

Q: 17) Do you want to analyze what influence the usage conditions have on the
susceptibility to damage of the installed equipment?

Explanation: For example, if there is a connection between breakdown frequency and usage
site. If yes, you should work with functional locations.

A:

Q: 18) Do you need to document your technical objects according to their usage time for

A:

Q: 19) Do you determine the business partners (internal and/or external) whose
address(es) you require, if you need maintenance requests for a particular functional
location?

Explanation: Partner functions

A:

Q: 20) Do you want to archive master records for functional locations? If yes, provide a
copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving
requirements.

A:

Q: 21) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects
(functional location, equipment) user-specific?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects

A:

7.4.2. Equipment

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have technical serviceable items (for example, PCs) as a reference in
Customer Service (for example, in orders)? If yes, give an example.

A:

Q: 2) Do you identify these for information only in unchecked system numbers and/or using
master records, such as serial number records or equipment master records?

A:

Q: 3) Which serviceable objects need to be entered as equipment master data?

A:

Q: 4) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.

A:

Q: 5) How many pieces of customer equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

A:

Q: 6) Is each individual piece of equipment in your company identified by a serial number
(by your production department and/or by the manufacturer)?

A:

Q: 7) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of the
manufacturer as a reference/key for that object?

A:

Q: 8) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (including
costing, statistics, and so on)?

A:

Q: 9) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handle
individually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them.

A:

Q: 10) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records in
conjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods
movements)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 11) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,
in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?

A:

Q: 12) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address
when you need service requests for a particular piece of equipment.


A:

Q: 13) Add other partners to the list, if necessary.

A:

Q: 14) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipment
master records? If yes, give some examples.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 15) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and
counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.

A:



your vendors).

A:

Q: 17) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether these
should be recorded individually for each piece of equipment.

A:

check result?

A:

Q: 19) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting
work on specific equipment?

A:

Q: 20) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories or
information about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example.

A:

Q: 21) Do you classify equipment? If yes, how?


A:

Q: 22) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?

Explanation: Usage history

A:



A:


Q: 24) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of your
document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving
requirements.

A:

7.4.3. Fleet Object

Questions:

Q: 1) Which serviceable objects need to be entered as equipment master data?

A:


A:

Q: 3) How many pieces of customer equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

movements)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

when you need service requests for a particular piece of equipment.


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


your vendors).

A:


A:

check result?

A:


A:



A:



A:



A:



A:

requirements.

A:

Q: 23) Which types of fleet objects do you want to manage?

Explanation: Define fleet object types.

A:

Q: 24) Which data do you want to see/maintain within the fleet object?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects. A customer exit exists for user-
defined master data (business add-in).

A:

Q: 25) Which types of utilities and consumables do you want to maintain?

Explanation: For example, fuel or oil. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this
field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run
reports as a search help.

A:


Q: 26) For what purpose do you intend to use your fleet objects?

Explanation: The definition of intended purpose uses a possible classification of fleet objects
for the search. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, it
need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help.

A:

Q: 27) Which engine types do your fleet objects have? Do you want to maintain these?

Explanation: For example: Diesel engine, turbines and so on. Note: For 4.6B, there are no
additional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration,
but can be used to run reports as a search help.

A:

Q: 28) Which unit of consumption do you require?

Explanation: Steps for defining the units of consumption: 1. Define consumption categories
(for example, energy consumption over distance or over time) 2. Create corresponding units
(for example, liters/kilometer, gallons/mile, watts/hour and so on)

A:

Q: 29) Which counter types do you require (for example, kilometer counter, consumption
counter, time counter and so on)?

A:

Q: 30) How do you want to name your counters?

Explanation: IMG: Define special measurement positions for fleet objects

A:

Q: 31) How do you want to calculate your consumption?

Explanation: - Which counters are used as a basis? - What unit should be used? - What is
the consumption category (for example, consumption/activity or activity/consumption ->
inversion flag)? - How long should the calculation last?

A:

7.4.4. Bill of Material for Functional Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use functional location BOMs?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) How are they structured?

A:

Q: 3) Will you need to use engineering change management to control BOM changes?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

7.4.5. Equipment Bill of Material

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have structures for special sub-items?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes, are they pieces of equipment that you want to trace on monitor?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) If you use equipment hierarchies, describe some examples of when and how they are
structured.

A:


A:

Q: 5) Do you currently have equipment BOMs (spare parts lists)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) If so, are they stored electronically?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) How are equipment BOMs structured?

A:

Q: 8) How are BOMs linked to equipment masters?

A:

Q: 9) Will you need to use Engineering Change Management to manage your BOMs?

A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you also construct BOMs with alternative materials?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use variant configuration?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

7.4.6. Installed Base

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to use IBase management (a) purely for documentation and
management of an object structure (i.e. a production process) or (b) as a limited substitute for
bills of material?

Explanation: For (a): For information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (a): For
information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (b): The decisive advantage of
installed base management as against bills of material is that it is multi-levelled and time-
based. The structure of an installed base hierarchy is possible with individualization without
using equipment - for example, using serial numbers (complete equipment), or without
equipment (with only device data). However, when building an alternative structure for the
equipment hierarchy, an inheritance is not possible, neither is setting a status. a status. It is
possible to install an installed base structure in the form of a subscreen in the screen
templates for a notification or a technical object using the corresponding Customizing tables.
object using the corresponding Customizing tables.

A:

Q: 2) Which object types are part of your installed base hierarchy?

A:
7.4.7. Reference Functional Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have many similar objects to reproduce the technical structures of your
customers site?

A:

Q: 2) Do you have standardized functional location structures that should be represented as
reference functional locations?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) According to which criteria do you intend to structure your functional location
hierarchies (for example geographical, functional or technical aspects)?

A:

7.5. Task Lists

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have work plans for service tasks in your current IT system or databases?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to archive maintenance task lists? If so, please provide a copy of your
document archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specific
archiving requirements.

A:

7.5.1. General Task List

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require configurable task lists?

A:

Q: 2) Do you classify general task lists? If yes, how?


A:

Q: 3) How do you group your general task lists?

Explanation: Group counter

A:

7.6. Maintenance Plans and Service Agreements

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you offer a preventive maintenance service to your customers? If so, please
describe in detail the different types of preventive maintenance offered.

A:

Q: 2) How will you create maintenance plans (e.g., representing individual maintenance
items or by grouping a number of maintenance items)?

A:

Q: 3) Will you plan the preventive maintenance separatly for each maintenance equipment
or will you establish a preventive maintenance plan for a group of maintenance objects (e.g.,
one plan for a production line that consists of several pieces of equipment)?

A:

Q: 4) Do you have different frequencies for the execution of your maintenance tasks and
would you like to have all of them in just one maintenance plan?

Explanation: If yes -> Strategy-based maintenan If no -> Single-cycle maintenance plan

A:

Q: 5) If the maintenance plans generate service entry sheets for a MM external
management, should they be directly created by the plans or after the orders are
created/released?

A:

Q: 6) For what types of service object do you create maintenance items?

A:

Q: 7) Will you have pre-defined activity lists (task lists) for your different preventive
maintenance services that list the required work steps (including estimated work time), spare
parts and/or tools?

A:

Q: 8) If yes, are those activity lists specific for the different equipment types (machine types)
or different functional locations for which you offer preventive maintenance?

A:

Q: 9) Do you want to archive maintenance plans? If so, please provide a copy of your

A:

7.6.1. Warranty

Questions:


your vendors).

A:

Q: 2) Which materials contain warranty agreements?


A:

Q: 3) To which objects should warranties be assigned?

A:

Q: 4) Describe the different warranties for your objects and specify whether these should be
listed individually for each object.

A:

Q: 5) What is the current procedure? Automatically or manually?

A:

check result?

A:

Q: 7) Which warranty counters are used?

Explanation: For example, 12 months, 60,000 km and so on.

A:

7.6.2. Service Contract

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you presently separate your standard contracts by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?

A:

Q: 2) What information do you capture on a service contract?

A:

Q: 3) Do you plan revenues using SD quotations or SD orders/contracts?

A:

Q: 4) Is the customer project contract similar to the customer project quotation? (If yes,
consider creating with reference to the quotation. If no, consider creating a new project.)

A:

Q: 5) What are the reference numbers on the customer purchase order (PO) that relate to a
project quotation? (You can enter them in the fields for additional data in the sales contract.)

A:

Q: 6) On which level do you monitor and control project-related revenues? (Consider the
implications for selection of billing elements in the whole WBS.)

A:

Q: 7) How do you calculate your sales price?

A:

Q: 8) Do you need automatic billing blocks released by the project? (If yes, consider using
project milestones to release the block.)

A:

Q: 9) Do you need to define fixed dates that act as project milestones in the sales contract?

A:

Q: 10) Do you need to evaluate your projects based on multiple characteristics (for example
by product line, project type, geographic location)? (If yes, consider using Profitability
Analysis (PA) and settling your projects to PA.)

A:

Q: 11) What kind of contract do you use?

A:

Q: 12) Do you negotiate contracts to use as a basis for sales orders?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a
contract? If so, then for what reasons?

A:

Q: 14) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, delivery
times, commitment dates, validity periods)?

A:

Q: 15) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?

A:

Q: 16) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the same
contract?

A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 17) Do you check available stock (availability check)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 18) Do you adjust prices after a period of time?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 19) Do you want to reprice for release orders (call-offs)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 20) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 21) Can you exceed these quantities in subsequent documents?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 22) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? If
so, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?

A:

Q: 23) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do you
use this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),
service management)?

A:

Q: 24) Do you have long-term service agreements with your customers (for example to
perform preventive maintenance on your customer equipment periodically)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 25) If so, please describe the different types of service contracts that you offer to your
customer (for example differentiation by validity period or type of service).

A:

Q: 26) Can your customer choose between different contract options (for example, 24h
versus 12h response times)? List all options available for the different contract types.


A:

Q: 27) Will the contract options selected by the customer influence the pricing of the service
contract? If so, please describe the criteria influencing the price.

A:

Q: 28) Do you have contract-specific price agreements with your customers, and if so, what
do they look like (for example, the service contract with the customer covers all the spare
parts that are used during a service under the contract)?

A:

Q: 29) What technical objects are covered by the service contract item. Do you use one
service contract per piece of equipment, or does one service contract includes all the
customer's equipment?

A:

Q: 30) Do you want to assign maintenance plans to your customer maintenance contracts?

A:

Q: 31) Do you use resource-related billing for contracts? Describe when you would use this
functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting), service
management).

A:

Q: 32) Do you offer master contracts to which other contracts are linked?

A:

Q: 33) What types of text do you require on your service contracts? Are they required on
output?

A:

Q: 34) What information in a service contract do you consider obligatory and would like to
appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the document
as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

A:

Q: 35) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a service contract? If so,
what are they?

A:

Q: 36) Do you send contract confirmations? If yes, how?

A:

7.6.3. Single Cycle Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the single cycle maintenance
plan?

A:

Q: 2) What character does the cycle have?

Explanation: The standard R/3 System is based on periodic cycles.

A:
7.6.4. Multiple Counter Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) Should just performance-based (counter-based) or also time-based maintenance
cycles be integrated into the multiple counter-based maintenance plan?

A:

Q: 2) Do you use cycle sets for the attachment of multiple counter plans?

Explanation: Cycle sets as a copy model for maintenance cycles.

A:

Q: 3) Which counters for which technical objects (functional locations, equipment) should be
assigned to the individual maintenance cycles?

A:

Q: 4) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

A:

Q: 5) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) or
late (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenance
activities for the same equipment?

A:

Q: 6) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog?

A:

Q: 7) List the different service cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenance
activities should be based. For example, an inspection is performed every 6 months, but not
within the first year.


A:

Q: 8) Do you want to plan the maintenance service for your customers independently of
your hierarchy of technical objects?

A:

Q: 9) Should such a preventive maintenance service be provided in conjunction with a
customer service contract?

A:

7.6.5. Strategy Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the strategy-based maintenance
plan?

A:


A:


A:


A:

Q: 5) List the different service cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenance
activities should be based. For example, an inspection is performed every 6 months, but not
within the first year.

A:

Q: 6) Do you want to plan the maintenance service for your customers independently of
your hierarchy of technical objects?

A:

Q: 7) Should such a preventive maintenance service be provided in conjunction with a
customer service contract?

A:

7.7. Solution Database

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you sell products for which detailed technical information is required in order to
introduce necessary error handling?

Explanation: Creation of a solution database with information on errors which have occurred
(symptoms) and possible solutions.

A:

Q: 2) Is the offer of a solution database helpful for the notification processor?

Explanation: For example, in the case of the employee responsible being insufficiently
qualified or very complex technical facts.

A:

Q: 3) Do recurring problems constantly appear during notification processing that are linked
with a complex solution process?

A:

Q: 4) Is there a bottleneck in specialist knowledge in your area?

A:

Q: 5) Is error diagnosis an essential step in your area or is it "only" used for short-term error
handling?

A:

Q: 6) Are you already using (computer-supported) Help for error analysis and handling
based on a knowledge or error database?

Explanation: Transfer of already-identified errors and proposed solutions to the solution
database.

A:

7.7.1. Symptom

Questions:

Q: 1) Structure existing problems based on criteria?

Explanation: If yes, possible use of catalogs (code groups, codes) in R/3.

A:

7.8. Additional Master Data
7.8.1. Counter/Measuring Point


Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring points
and counters?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

7.8.2. Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to create an inspection catalog of characteristic features, causes of
defects,and usage decisions that occur when customer service work is executed?

A:

Q: 2) Describe your current catalogs and their structure.

A:

7.8.3. Permit

Questions:


A:



A:

8. Plant Maintenance
8.1. Technical Objects (Structuring of Technical Systems)

Questions:

Q: 1) How should your technical systems be structured?

Explanation: Which components should be represented as functional locations, pieces of
equipment, assemblies and so on? Are bills of material required to represent the structure of
the technical system? For detailed questions about the structuring of technical systems, see
the relevant technical objects.

A:

Q: 2) What kinds of technical objects do you handle (for example, objects that can be
dismantled or used for different purposes in different production stages etc.)?

A:

Q: 3) How is information about technical objects organized and stored in your company (for
example, via EDV, file cards or no information at all)?

A:


Questions:

Q: 1) Do you manage objects that are immovable and that usually have a long operational
life (for example, clarification plants)?

A:

Q: 2) Do you require additional functionality to structure your maintenance objects?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) If yes, which objects need to be represented with functional locations?

A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

Q: 9) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change (for
example, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)?

A:

Q: 10) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a)
from a procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)?

A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


your vendors).

A:

check result?

A:




A:



A:


A:

location?


A:

requirements.

A:



A:

8.1.2. Equipment

Questions:

Q: 1) Which maintenance objects must be entered as equipment master data?

A:


A:

Q: 3) How many pieces of equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

movements)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

when you need maintenance requests for a particular piece of equipment.


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No


A:


your vendors).

A:


A:

check result?

A:


A:


A:



A:

Q: 20) Are some pieces of equipment created as production resources/tools?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:

Q: 23) Do you want to generate/change a related asset automatically when
creating/changing a piece of equipment, and/or vice-versa?

Explanation: This is a Workflow in both directions, which requires an assignment of
corresponding fields, and is activated in Customizing. Changes to the equipment and/or asset
master record are also updated automatically in the corresponding asset or equipment
master record.

A:

requirements.

A:

8.1.3. Fleet Object

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

movements)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



your vendors).

A:


A:

check result?

A:


A:


A:



A:



A:



A:

requirements.

A:


Q: 23) Which types of fleet objects do you want to manage?

Explanation: Define fleet object types.

A:

Q: 24) Which data do you want to see/maintain within the fleet object?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects. A customer exit exists for user-
defined master data (business add-in).

A:

Q: 25) Which types of utilities and consumables do you want to maintain?

Explanation: For example, fuel or oil. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this
field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run
reports as a search help.

A:

Q: 26) For what purpose do you intend to use your fleet objects?

Explanation: The definition of intended purpose uses a possible classification of fleet objects
for the search. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, it
need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help.

A:

Q: 27) Which engine types do your fleet objects have? Do you want to maintain these?

Explanation: For example: Diesel engine, turbines and so on. Note: For 4.6B, there are no
additional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration,
but can be used to run reports as a search help.

A:

Q: 28) Which unit of consumption do you require?

Explanation: Steps for defining the units of consumption: 1. Define consumption categories
(for example, energy consumption over distance or over time) 2. Create corresponding units
(for example, liters/kilometer, gallons/mile, watts/hour and so on)

A:

Q: 29) Which counter types do you require (for example, kilometer counter, consumption
counter, time counter and so on)?

A:

Q: 30) How do you want to name your counters?

Explanation: IMG: Define special measurement positions for fleet objects

A:

Q: 31) How do you want to calculate your consumption?

Explanation: - Which counters are used as a basis? - What unit should be used? - What is
the consumption category (for example, consumption/activity or activity/consumption ->
inversion flag)? - How long should the calculation last?

A:

8.1.4. Production Resource/Tool as Equipment

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functional
location, equipment) user-specific?


A:


master record.

A:


A:


A:

regularly?

A:

8.1.5. Reference Functional Location


Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have many similar technical structures in your organization?

A:

Q: 2) Do you have standardized functional location structures that should be represented as
reference functional locations?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) According to which criteria do you intend to structure your functional location
hierarchies (for example geographical, functional or technical aspects)?

A:

8.1.6. Bill of Material for Functional Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use functional location BOMs?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) How are they structured?

A:

Q: 3) Will you need to use engineering change management to control BOM changes?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

8.1.7. Equipment Bill of Material

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have structures for special sub-items?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes, are they pieces of equipment that you want to trace on monitor?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) If you use equipment hierarchies, describe some examples of when and how they are
structured.

A:



A:

Q: 5) Do you currently have equipment BOMs (spare parts lists)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) If so, are they stored electronically?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) How are equipment BOMs structured?

A:

Q: 8) How are BOMs linked to equipment masters?

A:

Q: 9) Will you need to use Engineering Change Management to manage your BOMs?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you also construct BOMs with alternative materials?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use variant configuration?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

8.1.8. Object Link

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to define and represent horizontal object links?

A:

Q: 2) If so, for which of the following objects do you want to display the links?

A:

Q: 3) Which types of relationship exist between the linked objects (1:1, 1:n, n:n)?

A:


8.1.9. Installed Base

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to use IBase management (a) purely for documentation and
management of an object structure (i.e. a production process) or (b) as a limited substitute for
bills of material?

Explanation: For (a): For information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (a): For
information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (b): The decisive advantage of
installed base management as against bills of material is that it is multi-levelled and time-
based. The structure of an installed base hierarchy is possible with individualization without
using equipment - for example, using serial numbers (complete equipment), or without
equipment (with only device data). However, when building an alternative structure for the
equipment hierarchy, an inheritance is not possible, neither is setting a status. a status. It is
possible to install an installed base structure in the form of a subscreen in the screen
templates for a notification or a technical object using the corresponding Customizing tables.
object using the corresponding Customizing tables.

A:

Q: 2) Which object types are part of your installed base hierarchy?

A:

8.2. Task Lists

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have work plans for service tasks in your current IT system or databases?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to archive maintenance task lists? If so, please provide a copy of your

A:

8.2.1. General Task List

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require configurable task lists?

A:

Q: 2) Do you classify general task lists? If yes, how?


A:


Q: 3) How do you group your general task lists?

Explanation: Group counter

A:

8.3. Maintenance Plans

Questions:

Q: 1) How will you create maintenance plans (e.g., representing individual maintenance
items or by grouping a number of maintenance items)?

A:

Q: 2) Will you plan the preventive maintenance separately for each maintenance equipment
or will you establish a preventive maintenance plan for a group of maintenance objects (e.g.,
one plan for a productionline that consists of several pieces of equipment)?

A:

Q: 3) Do you have different frequencies for the execution of your maintenance tasks and
would you like to have all of them in just one maintenance plan?

Explanation: If yes -> Strategy-based maintenance plan If no -> Single-cycle maintenance
plan

A:

Q: 4) If the maintenance plans generate service entry sheets for a MM external
management, should they be directly created by the plans or after the orders are
created/released?

A:

Q: 5) For what types of service object do you create maintenance items?

A:

Q: 6) Will you have pre-defined activity lists (task lists) for your different preventive
maintenance services that list the required work steps (including estimated work time), spare
parts and/or tools?

A:

Q: 7) If yes, are those activity lists specific for the different equipment types (machine types)
or different functional locations for which you offer preventive maintenance?

A:


Q: 8) Do you want to archive maintenance plans? If so, please provide a copy of your

A:


Questions:

plan?

A:



A:

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Q: 7) List the different maintenance cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive
maintenance activities should be based.

Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within the
first year.

A:

Q: 8) Do you want to plan maintenance independently of your hierarchy of technical
objects?

A:


Questions:

plan?

A:


A:


A:


A:


first year.

A:

objects?

A:


Questions:


Q: 1) Do you possess technical objects that are required for detailed technical information in
order to introduce necessary error handling?

(symptoms) and proposed solutions.

A:



A:


A:


A:

handling?

A:


database.

A:

8.4.1. Symptom

Questions:



A:

8.5. Additional Master Data
8.5.1. Warranty

Questions:


your vendors).

A:

Q: 2) Which materials contain warranty agreements?

A:

Q: 3) To which objects should warranties be assigned?

A:

Q: 4) Describe the different warranties for your objects and specify whether these should be
listed individually for each object.

A:

Q: 5) What is the current procedure? Automatically or manually?

A:

check result?

A:

Q: 7) Which warranty counters are used?

Explanation: For example, 12 months, 60,000 km and so on.

A:

8.5.2. Counter/Measuring Point

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring points
and counters?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:

8.5.3. Revision

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there any revision planned where a production line or plant has to be shut down for
a certain time?

A:

8.5.4. Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to create an inspection catalog of characteristic features, causes of
defects, and usage decisions that occur when maintenance work is executed?

A:


A:

8.5.5. Permit

Questions:


A:



A:

9. Quality Management
9.1. QM General
9.1.1. Inspection Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain instructions and descriptions for the material inspection? Give an
example for an inspection plan that you currently use and explain which critical data it
contains.


A:

Q: 2) Are the inspection activities currently maintained in an online format and are the
detailed descriptions critical to the inspection process?

A:

Q: 3) Will you have more than one operation in the inspection process?

Explanation: Example: Operation 10: Visual inspection of packaging Operation 20: Record
results of laboratory analysis Describe the individual operations. (Note: Otherwise, a material
specification may be sufficient for inspection processing in certain circumstances).

A:

Q: 4) Do you have valid inspection descriptions and operations for each individual material
or for all materials? Describe them.

A:

Q: 5) Provide a copy of your document archiving method if available. If this is not available,
describe your specific archiving requirements.

A:

9.1.2. Work Center

Questions:

Q: 1) Note: For more information see "Work Center" under "General Master Data".

Explanation: This is just a note.

A:

Q: 2) Do you have multiple inspection locations (work centers) per plant? Describe these
locations, and identify how they are different.

A:

Q: 3) Are inspectors assigned to a definite work center?

A:

Q: 4) Will approval procedures comply to the work center or operation? Describe this in
detail.

A:

9.1.3. Inspection Characteristic/Master Inspection Characteristic

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to use qualitative and/or qualitative master inspection characteristics?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to check the control indicators?

A:

Q: 3) How do you want to classify the master inspection characteristics?

A:


A:

9.1.4. Processing of General Characteristics

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require value hierarchies?

A:

Q: 2) Do you plan to use engineering change management to change characteristics?

A:

Q: 3) Do you maintain multilingual descriptions for characteristics? Which languages are
relevant? How and when is the translation done?

A:

Q: 4) Do you maintain country-specific characteristics?

Explanation: Examples: Shoe or clothing sizes. The appropriate sizes are entered in the
sales order, depending on which country the customer is in.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) What units of measure are needed for characteristic values?

A:

Q: 6) What characteristic groups are needed?

A:

Q: 7) What characteristic statuses are needed?

A:

9.1.5. Material Specification

Questions:

Q: 1) You need a material specification to transfer quality inspection data to batch
management. The specification completes the inspection plan or replaces it entirely, if
detailed instructions are not required. (Information)

A:

Q: 2) Will you use material specifications as inspection criteria for your material?

A:

Q: 3) Will you transfer inspection data to the batch? If yes, to which characteristics does this
apply?

A:

9.1.6. Inspection Method

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain instructions for the inspection of characteristics? How are these
currently stored?

A:


A:

9.1.7. Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) Note: For questions about the catalog, see QM processes for results and defects
recording and usage decisions

Explanation: This is just a note.

A:

Q: 2) For which data are defects/results recorded for each catalog?

A:


A:


9.1.8. Selected Set

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use characteristic attributes for inspection characteristics? If yes, which
attributes do you use?

A:

Q: 2) Which codes do you use for the usage decision? Are they specific to every inspection
type?

A:

Q: 3) Which follow-up actions should be automatically performed after the usage decision is
made?

A:

9.1.9. Sampling Scheme

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to use special sampling schemes to calculate sample sizes?

A:

Q: 2) How are the samples to be valuated?

Explanation: Which procedure is to be used to valuate the results in the inspection lot (for
example, according to the number of nonconforming units in a lot?).

A:

Q: 3) Do you use tables that determine the number of parts to be withdrawn?

Explanation: This means that 'n' elements are to be taken from the delivery, for example,
based on the goods receipt quantity (with or without AQL authorization).

A:

Q: 4) Do you want to use sampling schemes in sample-drawing procedures?

Explanation: Do you want to determine a different number of physical samples according to
a default or pattern?

A:

9.1.10. Sampling Procedure

Questions:

Q: 1) How are the sample quantities to be calculated and what criteria are to be used?

A:

Q: 2) Which rules are used to accept or reject a characteristic or a sample?

Explanation: For example manually, based on a control chart and so on.

A:

Q: 3) Do you use dependent or independent multiple sampling procedures?

A:

9.1.11. Dynamic Modification Rule

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you define the inspection scope based on quality (this means for example, will
you check processes with a consistently low quality more regularly than those processes,
which constantly improve in quality)? Describe the procedure.

A:

Q: 2) Will you vary the sample size between a defined scope (for example, 100%) and a
skip (that is, a certain number of deliveries or inspection lots have not been inspected).
Describe which rotation intervals you use?

A:

9.1.12. Sample-Drawing Procedure

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you want to calculate the sample size?

A:

Q: 2) Which physical-sample types (for example, primary samples, pooled samples, and
reserve samples) will you draw?

Explanation: Settings for defining physical sample types in QM Customizing.

A:

Q: 3) Which physical-sample types will you process? (for example, sample from production,
competitor)

A:

9.1.13. Production Resources/Tools

Questions:

your materials?

A:


A:


A:


A:

regularly?

A:

Q: 6) QM: List any external equipment or gauges which will be used to capture results or
defects and transfer to the R/3 System.

A:

9.1.14. QM Order

Questions:

Q: 1) In which plants should quality costs be determined?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to record quality costs for quality inspections? If yes, do you want to
evaluate the costs collectively or for each inspection lot?

Explanation: Reference to QM order types QL01 und Ql02

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to record costs for quality notifications?

Explanation: Reference to QM order type QN01.

A:

Q: 4) How will you evaluate quality costs? Do you want to evaluate your inspection costs at
goods receipt or based on the material level?

Explanation: Note: Order assignment in the material master for the inspection type.


A:

Q: 5) Which activities (for example, personel time, setup times etc) do you want to confirm
for your QM order?

Explanation: Note: Work center / Activity types

A:

Q: 6) In which period should the quality costs be settled?

Explanation: Reconciliation in CO of the time periods, in which orders are to be settled (for
example, monthly, quarterly, annually).

A:

9.1.15. Archiving QM Objects

Questions:


A:

Q: 2) Do you want to archive master inspection characteristics? If so, provide a copy of your
procedure for archiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archiving
requirements in detail.

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to archive inspection methods? If so, provide a copy of your procedure
for archiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archiving requirements
in detail.

A:

Q: 4) Do you want to archive inspection plans? If so, provide a copy of your procedure for
archiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archiving requirements in
detail.

A:

9.2. QM in Materials Management
9.2.1. Quality Info Record

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you expect quality certificates (for example, plant certificates or analysis
certificates) from your suppliers before or during material shipping? Describe which document
types you need and give examples.

A:

Q: 2) Will you require samples from your suppliers for release before shipping the goods?
Describe them.

A:

Q: 3) Describe your vendor approval process.

Explanation: How and where is your list of approved vendors managed? Are all buyers
authorized to select and approve a vendor?

A:

Q: 4) Will you allow conditional approvals for new vendors (for example, quantity-related or
time-related limitation)?

A:

Q: 5) Will you monitor your vendors' quality management system (for example, ISO 9000
conformity)? Give examples of how and where you manage this data at the moment.

A:

Q: 6) Describe how you block a vendor and the reasons for the block.

Explanation: Is the vendor / material combination or the vendor to be blocked?

A:

Q: 7) Do you not want to have any inspections for some vendor/material combinations?

Explanation: Inspection control in the quality info record.

A:

Q: 8) Do you want source inspections instead of goods receipt inspections for certain
material/vendor combinations?

Explanation: Vendor source inspection in the info record.

A:

Q: 9) Do you use quality assurance agreements that are specific to a material or vendor?

Explanation: Creation of quality assurance agreement in the quality info record.

A:


Q: 10) Will you block an incoming invoice until the quality inspection has been successfully
completed or if the lot is rejected for payment? (Note: The block can be manually removed if
required).

A:

Q: 11) Will you pre-approve a vendor sample prior to releasing the delivery? Please
describe the procedure.

A:

Q: 12) Do you have model or preliminary series inspections etc?

A:

9.3. QM in Production
9.3.1. Routing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:

operations?


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

purposes?

A:


A:


A:

mass changes etc.)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

9.3.2. Master Recipe

Questions:

Q: 1) How many different master recipes will you need?

A:

Q: 2) What will you use recipes for?

A:

Q: 3) Will you have several alternative recipes for one material (for example, depending on
the lot size) and do you want these to be combined (recipe group)?

A:

Q: 4) Will you use one recipe to produce different materials?


A:

Q: 5) Do you use formulas to calculate the quantities of the components (material quantity
calculation)? Do you want characteristic values such as concentration to be taken into
account?

A:

Q: 6) Which control recipe destinations will you need?

A:

Q: 7) If the control recipe destination is a person/group of people, which areas (weighing,
quality inspection, production, etc.) will be affected? Do you want to represent this logical
distribution according to user department or using material flow?

A:

Q: 8) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of changes? How do
you want the validity of the recipe to be defined?

A:

Q: 9) Will you require an approval procedure to change recipes? Will a digital signature be
required (change request/order)?

A:

Q: 10) Which relationships will exist between the phases within a recipe?

A:

Q: 11) Do you want the operations/phases to create capacity requirements?

A:

Q: 12) Are the operations/phases be relevant for the calculation?

A:

Q: 13) Which type of processing do you want to be possible for operations?

A:

Q: 14) Which standard values will you use for the operations (for example, labor time,
machine time, setup time)?

A:

Q: 15) Will all phases be subject to confirmation?

A:


Q: 16) Will you use milestone confirmations?

A:

Q: 17) Which process instructions will you need?

A:

Q: 18) Will special user fields be required in the master recipe for information and printing
purposes?

A:

Q: 19) Besides the actual processing unit, will further resources be allocated to an operation
(secondary resources) that are, for example, only used for a limited time (for example, labor,
transportation trucks)? Do you want them to be relevant for confirmation

A:

Q: 20) Which objects will be allocated to the phases (for example, components, production
resources/tools)?

A:

Q: 21) Will temporary materials (INTRA) with separate material numbers be produced
during the production process that will be processed further immediately instead of being
delivered to storage?

A:

Q: 22) Will you carry out in-process quality inspections, (assigning inspection characteristics
to phases)?

A:

Q: 23) Should the recording of inspection results be carried out in QM? Or should it be dealt
with in the PI-Sheet (either by a QM-Jump or by sending the information via the process
message)?

A:

Q: 24) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of master recipes
(copy function, mass changes, etc.)?

A:

9.4. QM in Sales and Distribution
9.4.1. QM Control in Sales

Questions:


Q: 1) Will you manage quality management documents (customer agreements about quality
assurance and technical terms of delivery)? Give an example.

A:

Q: 2) Are these QM determinations customer-specific or are there additional material-
dependent factors?

A:

Q: 3) Will you manage electronic versions of your quality assurance agreements?

A:

Q: 4) Would it be an advantage for you to access quality assurance documents in the R/3
System?

A:

9.5. QM in Plant Maintenance

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you usually have several technical objects for a customer that you want to
represent together? Do you require additional functionality to structure this accordingly?

A:

Q: 2) If yes, which technical objects from customer sites should be combined using

A:

Q: 3) Do you manage objects that are immovable and that usually have a long operational
life (for example, clarification plants)?

A:

Q: 4) Do you require additional functionality to structure your maintenance objects?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) If yes, which objects need to be represented with functional locations?

A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:

Q: 11) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change
(for example, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)?

A:

Q: 12) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a)
from a procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)?

A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



your vendors).

A:

check result?

A:



A:



A:


A:

location?


A:

requirements.

A:



A:

9.5.2. Equipment

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

movements)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


your vendors).

A:


A:

check result?

A:


A:


A:



A:

Q: 20) Are some pieces of equipment created as production resources/tools?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:


master record.

A:

requirements.

A:


Questions:

plan?

A:



A:

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


first year.

A:

objects?

A:


Questions:

plan?

A:


A:


A:


A:


first year.

A:

objects?

A:


Questions:

Q: 1) Do you possess technical objects that are required for detailed technical information in
order to introduce necessary error handling?

(symptoms) and proposed solutions.

A:



A:



A:


A:

handling?

A:


database.

A:

9.6.1. Symptom

Questions:



A:

10. Environment, Health and Safety

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you currently obtain your MSDS phrases, hazardous substance data, ICD codes,
EWC codes, and so on from content providers?

A:

Q: 2) Do you use in phrases in such a large number of languages that you need a number
of code pages (for example, 1100, 1500, 8000)?

Explanation: If so, EH&S Language Support must be initialized in Customizing.

A:

10.1. Product Safety

Questions:

Q: 1) How is your environmental protection organization structured (structure,
responsibilities)?

A:

10.1.1. Substance

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you handle hazardous substances (classified as such by chemicals laws)? How
many different substances?

A:

Q: 2) Are dangerous goods produced in your enterprise? Roughly how many?

A:

Q: 3) Are you the first in your country to use or import some hazardous substances? How
many substances?

A:

Q: 4) To which countries do you deliver hazardous substances?

A:

Q: 5) Should dangerous goods data/information be entered in the database or merely kept
as safety data sheets?

A:

Q: 6) Is there any legacy data and what is its status?

A:

Q: 7) What format does this legacy data have?

A:

Q: 8) What are the existing types of substances, for example, pure substances, hazardous
substances, products, preparations, other?

A:

Q: 9) Which views does your substance master have, for example, physical-chemical data,
toxicological data, legal requirements, legal ratings, proven technical knowledge?

A:

Q: 10) Are you familiar with the EH&S standard properties tree and to what extent does it
fulfill your requirements?

A:

Q: 11) Is your substance data subject to different levels of confidentiality. Which ones
(internal, official, released, other)?

A:

Q: 12) Do you have a detailed authorization concept? Describe it.

A:

Q: 13) For which jurisdictions do you enter substance data and/or create substance reports,
for example, EU, USA, Japan?

A:

Q: 14) Which data provider supplies your data and in what format?

A:

Q: 15) Which substance names, numbers, and formulas do you use?

A:

Q: 16) Do you distribute your substance data to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?

A:

Q: 17) What relationship exists between your substances and your materials, for example
1:1, 1:n, n:m, other?

A:

Q: 18) Do you maintain the notification status for your products? If so, for which substance
lists?

A:

10.1.2. Phrase

Questions:

Q: 1) Do your legacy systems contain phrases?

A:

Q: 2) Which phrase libraries (text modules) do you use? Which languages are they in?

A:


Q: 3) Do you still use your existing phrase libraries or are they to be harmonized or
replaced?

A:

Q: 4) Do you use external services such as translation or update services for your phrases?

A:

Q: 5) Do you distribute your phrases to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?

A:

10.1.3. Report

Questions:

Q: 1) Which categories of substance reports do you use and/or create, for example, MSDS,
labels, TREMcards, standard operating procedures, other?

A:

Q: 2) Do you label used waste containers?

A:

Q: 3) Do the contents and the structure of the standard report templates fulfill your
requirements?

A:

Q: 4) How many different material safety data sheets exist in your enterprise?

A:

Q: 5) How is shipping of your substance reports triggered?

A:

Q: 6) How is the recipient of your substance reports determined?

A:

Q: 7) How do you want to set up the shipping process (status network)?

A:

Q: 8) Do you want to set up an output check for the shipping order?

A:

Q: 9) Do you want to work with acknowledgements of receipt?

A:

Q: 10) Do you want to log the return of the acknowledgement of receipt?

A:

Q: 11) Do you want to save the historical report documents?

A:

Q: 12) Do you want to define your own objects for report management in addition to the
existing objects "person who had accident, material master, substance master, work area"?

A:

10.2. Dangerous Goods Management

Questions:

Q: 1) How is the dangerous goods organization in your enterprise governed and which
enterprise area performs which tasks?

A:

Q: 2) Are external enterprises used to transport dangerous goods?

A:

Q: 3) Which areas also require read access to dangerous goods data and for what
purpose?

A:

Q: 4) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and dangerous goods
management organized in your enterprise?

Explanation: Important for link between accident reports in accordance with the German
dangerous goods officer directive (GbV) and incident/accident management (workers'
compensation association).

A:

Q: 5) How is cooperation between product safety, waste management, and dangerous
goods management organized (phrases, substance properties)?

A:

10.2.1. Dangerous Goods

Questions:


Q: 1) Do you ship dangerous goods that require labeling?

A:

Q: 2) On the basis of which validity areas/regulations are dangerous goods shipped, for
example, IMDG, IATA, ADR, 49 CFR?

A:

Q: 3) Which modes of transport are used for shipping: road, sea, air, rail, inland waterway?

A:

Q: 4) Which shipping types are used in connection with the modes of transport, for
example, road (shipping company), postal service, parcel service, courier service?

A:

Q: 5) Do you make use of exceptions and exemptions when transporting dangerous goods?

A:

Q: 6) Do you have different UN numbers for different dangerous goods regulations in your
product range?

A:

Q: 7) Do you want to transfer dangerous goods data from existing systems or obtain data
from providers?

A:

Q: 8) Which data provider supplies you with regulations data and in what format?

A:

Q: 9) Which product groups do you have to classify as dangerous goods, for example,
paints, solvents, key chemicals?

A:

Q: 10) How many different dangerous goods ratings do you have? How big is your
dangerous goods product range?

A:

Q: 11) Which dangerous goods checks do you want to perform?

A:

Q: 12) Which other dangerous goods checks do you need?


A:

Q: 13) Should dangerous goods be classified (EHS expert)?

A:

10.2.2. Phrase

Questions:


A:

replaced?

A:


A:

10.2.3. TREMcard

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there completed tremcards available in your enterprise? In what format are they?

A:

Q: 2) Are these existing tremcards individual, collective, class, or group tremcards?

A:

Q: 3) Do you have tremcards in different languages?

A:

Q: 4) Do you want to transfer the existing tremcards?

Explanation: Transfer as inbound documents.

A:

10.2.4. Dangerous Goods Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Are transport documents created in your enterprise or are they created externally?

A:


Q: 2) Are transport documents created with EDP support?

A:

10.3. Waste

Questions:

Q: 1) How is waste management organized in your enterprise (centrally, decentrally)?

A:

Q: 2) Which validity area does this waste management have?

A:

Q: 3) Are external enterprises given the task of disposal processing?

A:

Q: 4) Do you perform on-site disposal?

A:

Q: 5) Do you have central/decentral accumulation points?

A:

Q: 6) Are there any disposal channels that are not predefined?

A:

Q: 7) Is waste management organized to be cross-company code?

A:

Q: 8) Is waste management organized to be cross-plant (number of plants)?

A:

Q: 9) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and waste management
organized in your enterprise?

A:

Q: 10) How is cooperation between waste management and dangerous goods
management organized in your enterprise (phrases, substance properties)?

A:

Q: 11) Is legacy data available in electronic format that is to be transferred?

A:

Q: 12) Do you want to distribute waste costs proportionally among the cost centers that
generated the waste (coordination with FI-CO)?

A:

Q: 13) Is purchasing organized centrally or decentrally (coordination with MM)?

A:

Q: 14) Is sales organized centrally or decentrally (coordination with SD)?

A:

Q: 15) Do you have detailed requirements for an authorization concept?

A:

Q: 16) Do you distribute your master data to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?

A:

Q: 17) How are your waste generator numbers structured?

A:

Q: 18) Do you exchange data with external service agents?

A:

10.3.1. Waste Master
10.3.1.1. Material Master

Questions:

Q: 1) How many types of waste are produced in your enterprise?

A:

Q: 2) Are there materials for this waste which you have to take back (for example, for
packaging materials) ?

A:

Q: 3) Are there any wastes of similar types that may have to be assigned to different waste
codes (owing to origin or disposer)?

A:

10.3.1.2. Specifications


Questions:

Q: 1) Which are the jurisdictions for which you enter waste properties and/or create reports?

A:

Q: 2) Do you also use internal company waste descriptions parallel to the descriptions in
official waste catalogs?

A:

Q: 3) Do you make your own waste analyses and do you manage them in the system?

A:

10.3.1.3. Waste Code/Waste Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) How hazardous are your wastes?

A:

Q: 2) Do you manage a number of waste catalogs?

A:

10.3.2. Waste Generator/Waste Disposer/Waste
Transporter/Authority

Questions:

Q: 1) Are wastes generated that are sent abroad?

A:

Q: 2) Where are internal points of waste generation defined/structured in your enterprise?

A:

Q: 3) How do you assign wastes?

A:

Q: 4) Do you perform the tasks of a waste transporter?

A:

Q: 5) Are there different disposal channels for one and the same waste (price/quantity
selection, interface to MM)?

A:

Q: 6) Do waste approval books need to be created by the disposer for the waste generator?

A:

Q: 7) Do you perform the tasks of a waste disposer?

A:

Q: 8) Which authorities are responsible for you?

A:

10.3.3. Waste Approval

Questions:

Q: 1) Are waste approvals managed or created with EDP support (specification database or
inbound document)?

A:

Q: 2) Which data is managed in conjunction with waste approvals?

A:

Q: 3) Are waste quantities recorded and managed in conjunction with the waste approval
procedure?

A:

Q: 4) Is the handover of wastes recorded and managed (note: dock receipts, waste
manifests)?

Explanation: Basis for creating waste life-cycle analyses with EDP support.

A:

Q: 5) In addition to the data for waste approvals, is data on transporters and disposal
facilities stored electronically (for example, planned disposal facilities, scope of a transport
license)?

A:

Q: 6) Are other documentation and approval obligations managed by external service
agents in conjunction with the waste approval procedure?

A:

Q: 7) Are the costs in connection with the waste approval procedure (creating, analyses
etc.) entered and managed?

A:


Q: 8) Which types of waste approval exist?

A:

10.4. Industrial Hygiene and Safety

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use SAP Business Partners?

Explanation: The following roles have been defined: report recipient, external persons,
physician, hospital.

A:

Q: 2) Do you use SAP Organizational Management?

Explanation: The following objects are required: exposure group, position.

A:

Q: 3) Do you use SAP Personnel Administration?

Explanation: If not, this means certain accident processing functions will be restricted.

A:

Q: 4) Do you use SAP Time Management?

Explanation: If not, this means no downtimes and no accident statistics can be determined.

A:

Q: 5) Do you use SAP Plant Maintenance (PM)?

Explanation: If not, this means certain functions for technical safety measures and
incident/accident management will be restricted.

A:

Q: 6) Do you use SAP Materials Management (MM)?

Explanation: If not, this means certain hazardous substance register functions will be
restricted.

A:

Q: 7) Do you use SAP Production Planning (PP)?


Explanation: Necessary for integration of work area/work center.

A:

Q: 8) Which companies is your industrial hygiene and safety organization responsible for
and in which jurisdiction are they based?

A:

Q: 9) How is industrial hygiene and safety and the role of safety officer organized in your
enterprise (area) and which enterprise area performs which tasks?

A:

Q: 10) How is the industrial hygiene and safety organization mapped in data processing?

Explanation: Modeling via Organizational Management.

A:

Q: 11) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and occupational health

Explanation: Important for data transfer between injury/illness log and incident/accident
management.

A:

Q: 12) How is cooperation between product safety and industrial hygiene and safety

Explanation: Coordination of the use of phrases, substance properties.

A:

Q: 13) Are external service agents used to perform tasks and which tasks do they perform?

A:

Q: 14) Which tasks are performed centrally and which tasks decentrally in the respective
areas of responsibility?

A:

Q: 15) Which access authorizations or restrictions are necessary for entering and
evaluating master data and movement data?

A:


Q: 16) Do you maintain a personal protection equipment catalog in your enterprise?

Explanation: Implemented as its own material group (MM).

A:

Q: 17) Do you use maintenance plans in your enterprise?

Explanation: Implemented using Plant Maintenance (PM), maintenance plans.

A:

Q: 18) Do you want health and safety briefings in your enterprise to be documented with
EDP support?

Explanation: Until this function has been included in the EH&S component, Training and
Event Management (HR, company instructions) is used to provide the function.

A:

Q: 19) Do you want qualification measures (safety officers) in your enterprise to be
documented with EDP support?

Explanation: Using Training and Event Management.

A:

Q: 20) Do you want site inspections in your enterprise to be documented with EDP support?

Explanation: Implemented in risk assessment (checklist, safety measure tracking).

A:

10.4.1. Phrase

Questions:


A:

replaced?

A:


A:


Q: 4) Do you distribute your phrases to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?

A:

10.4.2. Work Area

Questions:

Q: 1) How many work areas are there in your enterprise?

A:

Q: 2) What work areas and work area categories are there?

Explanation: The use of patterns (sample work areas) can reduce the amount of time and
effort needed to enter and update data.

A:

Q: 3) How are the work areas structured (hierarchical work area structure)?

A:

Q: 4) Which IHS data do you want to appear in standard operating procedures?

Explanation: Work area-related and/or substance-related agent types are possible; specific
information is stored directly under the work area.

A:

Q: 5) How do you assign the work area to existing organizational structures (plant, cost
center, storage location, work center, functional location)?

A:

Q: 6) Do you have specific software for managing your work areas? Which software is this?

A:

Q: 7) Are there any existing work areas in your legacy system that can be used?

A:

10.4.3. Agent (Industrial Hygiene and Safety)

Questions:

Q: 1) Which data is managed within the scope of the work center and risk assessment?

A:

Q: 2) Do you use operation statuses to differentiate exposure situations in work areas?

A:

Q: 3) What types of agents are there in your enterprise (for example, chemical substances,
noise, psychological factors)?

A:

Q: 4) How many individual agents are there in total in your enterprise?

A:

Q: 5) Do you use exposure groups?

Explanation: Can you group persons with the same exposure to form exposure groups? To
keep the time and effort spent on data maintenance to a minimum, the number of exposure
groups should be selected carefully.

A:

Q: 6) Do you have any work areas or persons with agents that change constantly?

A:

Q: 7) Do you have any persons with work areas that change constantly?

A:

Q: 8) Are you also responsible for external persons or employees of other companies?

A:

Q: 9) Which reference values do the exposure levels relate to (legal, enterprise-specific, or
other)?

A:

Q: 10) Do you require country-specific reference values? If so, for which countries?

A:

Q: 11) Do you take the measurements yourself? If so, which procedure do you use?

A:

Q: 12) Do you have specific software for managing your agent data? Which software is
this?

A:


Q: 13) Is there any existing agent data in your legacy system that can be used?

A:

10.4.4. Accident

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you only document accidents that have to be reported or all incidents with or
without injury to persons?

A:

Q: 2) Do you record cross-group and cross-country statistics for incidents and accidents?

A:

Q: 3) Which accident reports do you require?

Explanation: Only the German accident report is available.

A:

Q: 4) Do you track times and costs for incidents and accidents?

A:

Q: 5) Do you track follow-up activities for incidents and accidents?

A:

Q: 6) Do you use questionnaires for incident/accident analysis?

A:

Q: 7) Do you use workers' compensation association keys or similar to classify accidents?

A:

Q: 8) Do you have any special software for managing incident/accident data? Which
software is this?

A:

Q: 9) Is there any existing incident/accident data in your legacy system that needs to be
transferred?

A:

10.4.5. Safety Measures

Questions:

Q: 1) Which of the following safety measure categories do you use?

Explanation: Only technical safety measure categories can be tracked subsequently in Plant
Maintenance (PM).

A:

Q: 2) Which other safety measure categories do you need?

A:

Q: 3) Which of the following safety measure types do you use?

A:

Q: 4) Which other safety measure types do you need?

A:

10.4.6. Report

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there any completed standard operating procedures in your enterprise? In which
format are they?

A:

Q: 2) Are the existing standard operating procedures related to substances or work areas or
both?

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to transfer the existing standard operating procedures?

Explanation: Transfer as inbound documents.

A:

10.5. Occupational Health

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use SAP Business Partners?

Explanation: The following roles have been defined: health center, physician, laboratory.

A:

Q: 2) Do you use SAP Organizational Management?

Explanation: The following objects can be used: exposure group, position, job, task.

A:

Q: 3) Do you use SAP Personnel Administration?

Explanation: If not, this means certain accident processing functions will be restricted.

A:

Q: 4) Do you use SAP Time Management?

Explanation: If not, this means no downtimes and no accident statistics can be determined.

A:

Q: 5) Do you use SAP Materials Management (MM)?

Explanation: Usage possible for inventory management in Occupational Health.

A:

Q: 6) Do you have one or more of your own health centers or do you work with external
service agents?

A:

Q: 7) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and occupational health

A:

Q: 8) Are you responsible for a number of countries?

A:

Q: 9) Do you support other enterprises as a service provider?

A:

Q: 10) How is occupational health including first-aiders and company paramedics organized
in your enterprise (area) and which enterprise areas perform which tasks?

A:

Q: 11) How is occupational health mapped in data processing?

Explanation: Modeling via Organizational Management.

A:

Q: 12) Which tasks are performed centrally and which tasks decentrally in the respective
areas of responsibility?

A:

Q: 13) Do you want to document medical examination results in addition to the legal
requirements (protocol log)?

A:

Q: 14) Which access authorizations or restrictions are necessary for entering and
evaluating master data and movement data?

A:

Q: 15) Do you want qualification measures (first-aiders) in your enterprise to be
documented with EDP support?

Explanation: Via Training and Event Management.

A:

Q: 16) How do you schedule your appointments?

Explanation: By telephone, invitation list, mail, workflow?

A:

Q: 17) Do you want to document occupational diseases?

Explanation: Limited possibilities via incident/accident log (incident/accident management).

A:

10.5.1. Agent (Occupational Health)

Questions:

Q: 1) What types of agents are there in your enterprise (for example, chemical substances,
noise, psychological factors)?

A:

Q: 2) How many individual agents are there in total in your enterprise?

A:

Q: 3) Do you use exposure groups?


Explanation: Can you group persons with the same exposure to form exposure groups? To
keep the time and effort spent on data maintenance to a minimum, the number of exposure
groups should be selected carefully.

A:

Q: 4) Do you have any work areas or persons with agents that change constantly?

A:

Q: 5) Do you have any persons with work areas that change constantly?

A:

Q: 6) Are you also responsible for external persons or employees of other companies?

A:

Q: 7) Which reference values do the exposure levels relate to (legal, enterprise-specific, or
other)?

A:

Q: 8) Do you require country-specific reference values? If so, for which countries?

A:

Q: 9) Do you take the measurements yourself? If so, which procedure do you use?

A:

Q: 10) Is there any existing agent data in your legacy system that can be used?

A:

10.5.2. Protocols

Questions:

Q: 1) Which regulatory health surveillance protocols are necessary in your enterprise?

A:

Q: 2) Which of the following health surveillance protocol types do you use?

A:

Q: 3) Which of the following occupational health services does your Occupational Health
dept. offer?

A:

Q: 4) Which other occupational health services does your enterprise offer?


A:

Q: 5) Are you responsible for a number of countries and jurisdictions?

A:

Q: 6) Do you have health surveillance protocols and appointments in your legacy system
(protocol log) that are to be transferred?

A:

10.5.3. Medical Examinations

Questions:

Q: 1) Which medical examinations are necessary in your enterprise?

A:

Q: 2) Do you have an assignment between medical examinations and health surveillance
protocols?

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to transfer laboratory data automatically?

A:

Q: 4) Do you require interfaces to medical devices (for example, an audiometer)?

A:

Q: 5) Do you have examination results in your legacy system that are to be transferred?

A:

10.5.4. Medical Tests

Questions:

Q: 1) Which tests are assigned to your medical examinations?

A:

Q: 2) Do you save the results of the medical tests (blood count, audiograms, and so on)?

A:

10.5.5. Questionnaire

Questions:

Q: 1) Do occupational health questionnaires already exist in your enterprise?


A:

Q: 2) Are the questionnaires evaluated mechanically?

A:

Q: 3) Are you interested in automatic questionnaire scanning?

A:

Q: 4) Are you interested in online answering (intranet, Internet)?

A:

Q: 5) Do you require questionnaires in a number of languages?

A:

10.5.6. Question Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) Does a collection of occupational health questions already exist which are coded for
statistics purposes?

Explanation: It is advisable to convert existing questions with user-defined answers to
questions with answer criteria in order to make them easier to evaluate.

A:

10.5.7. Diagnosis Key

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use ICD codes?

A:

Q: 2) Do you use your own diagnosis keys?

A:

10.5.8. Injury/Illness Log

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to maintain other activities (administering medication, advice etc.) in
addition to first aid services (first aid log)?

A:

Q: 2) Which of the following types of injury/illness log entry do you want to use?

A:

Q: 3) Do you require other types in addition?

A:

Q: 4) Which of these types do you want to transfer to incident/accident management?

A:

Q: 5) Do you have a specific software program for keeping the first aid log?

A:

Q: 6) Is there any existing data in your legacy system that you want to transfer?

A:

Q: 7) Are injury/illness log entries also to be made for external employees?

A:

10.5.9. Reports

Questions:

Q: 1) Which of the predefined reports for the medical service do you require?

Explanation: In SAPscript form.

A:

11. Financial Accounting
11.1. G/L Account

Questions:

Q: 1) What procedure do you use when you need to create new account numbers?

Explanation: This can occur centrally or decentralized; Sample accounts can be used.

A:

Q: 2) Can you define groups of general ledger accounts that require similar information in
the master record?

A:

Q: 3) How many retained earnings accounts do you have?

A:


Q: 4) For which general ledger accounts do you wish to display line items?

A:

Q: 5) Which accounts do you wish to manage on an open item basis (for example, bank
clearing accounts)?

A:

Q: 6) Which accounts do you wish to maintain in foreign currency (for example, bank
accounts)?

A:

Q: 7) Describe any special requirements when posting to particular general ledger accounts
(for example, expense accounts require an associated cost center).

A:

Q: 8) What criteria do you use to search for G/L accounts?

Explanation: Matchcode

A:

Q: 9) Which of your General Ledger accounts are not relevant to tax?

A:

11.2. Ledger

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have to report in accordance with cost of sales accounting?

A:

Q: 2) Do you have special statutory accounting requirements that are not covered in other
R/3 applications? Example: Currency translation of a foreign subsidiary, different fiscal year
ends to the international trading partner.

Explanation: A special type of rendering of accounts is meant, which requires a characteristic
not contained in a standard SAP database.

A:

Q: 3) Have you defined the necessary domains and data elements in the ABAP Dictionary?

A:


11.3. Legal Consolidation
11.3.1. Item

Questions:

Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chart
of accounts (US GAAP, IAS, HGB)?

Explanation: Several FS items can be used within one dimension. Therefore financial
statements can be created parallel according to different requirements.

A:

Q: 2) Should retained earnings be disclosed in the balance sheet or in the income
statement?

A:

Q: 3) Should income statements be created using cost-of-sales accounting or period
accounting?

Explanation: ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! ATTENTION:
then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary!

A:

Q: 4) Do you summarize your operational accounts to group accounts (financial statement
items)?

A:

Q: 5) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level?

Explanation: How is the data reported - on account level or item level? How is the data
reported - on account level or item level?

A:

Q: 6) Do you require further freely definable classifications for your FS items?

Explanation: The illustration of such classifications takes place via the field "item category".
Characteristic values would be for example "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".
sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".

A:

Q: 7) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/L
chart of accounts or a financial statement version.

Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the
unit integration. the unit integration.

A:

Q: 8) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for posting
deferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancing
adjustment.

Explanation: ANI Balance sheet ANI Income statement Deferred income task balance sheet
Deferred income task income statement FS balancing adjustment item Unappropriated
retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings

A:

11.3.2. Subitem

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you want to define the subitems?

Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - Subitem category asset
transaction type numerical characteristic value 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your own
characteristic values? Or do you want to use your own characteristic values?

A:

Q: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?

A:

11.3.3. Sets (Namespace)

Questions:

Q: 1) Define suitable name spaces for the sets you use.

Explanation: Sets are aggregations of context-releated elements. Sets are needed in all
kinds of areas, such as data collection, currency translation, interunit elimination and
reporting. You can make life easier by using suitable set names when defining sets.

A:

11.4. Funds Management

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the relationship between the Financial Accounting fiscal year and the Funds
Management fiscal year (Budget year/ budget periods)

A:

Q: 2) Provide more details on the number of budget periods, special adjustment periods
and description of what is accomplished/processed in this special periods.

A:


Q: 3) Are there special budgetary structures to cover interim periods / special periods (e.g. if
budget has not been approved in time: provisional budgets)? How are these structures
related to the budget structures of the adopted budget?

A:

Q: 4) Please provide detail information on legal requirements within the budget
management sector (Financial regulations, internal rules, ....)

A:

Q: 5) Describe the current budget organizational structure (budget/master data hierarchy)
and the current nomenclature/scale. Create a list of the organizational units that are
responsible for the budget (execution).

Explanation: Describe the current budget organizational structure (budget hierarchy). Please
explain the current existing nomenclature/numbering (list the organizational units that are
responsible for the budget)

A:

Q: 6) Are there any legal requirements for nomenclature /structure of the master data?

A:

Q: 7) Is it possible to categorize the types of expenditure? Create a list of expenditure
types/categories and describe how these relate to the execution level.

A:

Q: 8) Describe the changes that may be made to the budget structure (master data) within a
year.

A:

Q: 9) Describe the changes that may be made to the budget structure (master data) over a
period of years.

A:

Q: 10) Describe the quantity and timing of changes of the budget structure

A:

Q: 11) Describe which information objects (master data) have to remain online in the
system, and for how long.

A:

Q: 12) Provide an overview of the volume of master data (FM).

A:

Q: 13) Explain which legacy data (historical data) needs to be transferred from the previous
system to Funds Management (level of detail, number of years, ...).

A:

11.4.1. Funds Center

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the funds center?
Describe the existing (planned) structure.

A:

Q: 2) Generate a list of all information to be stored at funds center level (list of fields, short
description, and properties of fields).

A:

Q: 3) Which information could be changed for a funds center? Create a list of all fields/field
contents.

A:

11.4.2. Commitment Item

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the commitment
item? Describe the existing (planned) structure.

A:

Q: 2) List the information to be stored at commitment item level (list of fields, short

A:

Q: 3) Which information may possibly be changed for a commitment item? Generate a list
of all fields/field contents.

A:

11.4.3. Fund

Questions:

Q: 1) Generate a list of funds origins (funds, funds from secondary sources). Are these
funds from secondary sources budgeted and assigned separately? Should these funds be
displayed separately for budgeting and execution?

A:


Q: 2) Provide an overview of the different fund types (for example, special revenue,
donations,....).

A:

Q: 3) Provide a list and a short description of your budget sources.

A:

Q: 4) Do you receive grants? If so, provide detailed information (USA).

Explanation: If you manage different funds (financing subsidies): Describe the
characteristics/special features/Funds Management requirements for these funds (life,
reporting period, special features with reference to the budget and budget execution).

A:

Q: 5) If you manage different funds (grants): Describe the characteristics/special
features/FM requirements for the fund (lifetime, reporting periods, special features with
regard to budget and budget execution).

A:

Q: 6) Is it possible to group the used funds (from secondary sources)? If so, describe the
groups and the funds belonging to them.

A:

Q: 7) Do you have special funds for internal services? How do you distribute the accrued
expenses to other funds?

A:

Q: 8) Do you have to produce financial statements by funds, fund groups, or fund types?
Provide an overview of those funds. (USA)

A:

Q: 9) Are budget/actual reports produced for funds/fund groups/fund type levels? Provide
an overview.

A:

Q: 10) Is there any special nomenclature (organization) for the name of the fund? Describe
the existing (planned) structure.

A:

Q: 11) List the information to be stored at application of funds/funds level (list of fields, short

A:

Q: 12) Which information could be changed for a fund? Create a list of all fields/field
contents.

A:

Q: 13) Do you have endowment funds? If so, please provide detailed information.

A:

Q: 14) Do you have grants (to be repaid, or not to be repaid) that are part of your budget but
are managed separately? If so, provide detailed information.

A:

11.4.4. Application of Funds

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the application of
funds? Describe the existing (planned) structure.

A:

Q: 2) List the information to be stored at application of funds/funds level (list of fields, short

A:

Q: 3) Which information may possibly changed for an application of funds? Generate a list
of all fields/field contents.

A:

12. Treasury
12.1. General
12.1.1. Business Partner

Questions:

Q: 1) What "categories" do you use to distinguish between different types of business
partner?

A:

Q: 2) Are your business partners natural persons, legal persons, or both?

A:

Q: 3) Are the partners related to each other?


A:

12.1.2. House Banks

Questions:

Q: 1) Which bank accounts do you use to process payments for your money market
transactions?

A:

Q: 2) Provide an overview of your house banks (the banks you have accounts with).

A:

12.1.3. Limits

Questions:

Q: 1) For each limit, specify which flows should be included in the calculation (only assets,
only liabilities, both assets and liabilities) and whether the amounts should be added or
subtracted.

A:

12.2. Treasury Management
12.2.1. Class

Questions:

Q: 1) Make a qualified estimate of your average positions for each class (annual average).

A:

Q: 2) Specify the quantities for each product group (number of securities accounts, number
of positions per securities account, number of classes).

A:

Q: 3) Which fields do you require for master data maintenance?

A:

12.2.2. Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) For what purposes do you use reference links between transactions?

A:

12.2.3. Securities Account

Questions:


Q: 1) How many securities accounts do you have at present?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to group your securities accounts into position valuation units (across
several securities accounts)?

A:

Q: 3) How do you split the positions in securities accounts that are not part of the premium
reserve fund into residual assets, restricted assets and unencumbered assets? (Germany)

A:

12.2.4. Position Indicator

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you structure the balance sheet accounts for securities in the general ledger
(determination of account assignment reference)?

A:

12.2.5. Market Data

Questions:

Q: 1) Which rates/prices do you need to value your positions?

A:

Q: 2) How do you currently update your security prices (automatically or manually)?

A:

12.3. Loans
12.3.1. Loan Products

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there a product sheet or product description for loans?

A:

Q: 2) According to which criteria have you classified your loan portfolio (for example,
according to product, term, ...)?

A:

Q: 3) Do you manage loans given and/or loans taken?

A:

Q: 4) Roughly categorize the types of loan you manage.

A:

Q: 5) Do you manage foreign currency loans?

A:

Q: 6) Do you post loans on the basis of customer accounts? (are payments monitored?)

A:

12.3.2. Collateral

Questions:

Q: 1) To what extent do you manage assigned loans (undisclosed assignments)?

A:

Q: 2) To what extent do you manage guaranteed loans? Who are the relevant guarantors?
To which loan products do guarantees apply?

A:

Q: 3) Do you process grants/subsidies to borrowers in conjunction with the relevant
institutions?

A:

Q: 4) Do you manage encumbrances (own rights, third-party rights)?

A:

Q: 5) What other collateral do you have to secure mortgage loans (e.g. life insurance)?

A:

Q: 6) Which basic data / assignment data do you enter in relation to collateral?

A:

12.3.3. Collateral Objects

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you determine collateral values? Who produces expert reports (technical
department, external expert)?

A:

Q: 2) What other collateral do you have to secure mortgage loans (e.g. life insurance)?

A:

Q: 3) Do you manage encumbrances (own rights, third-party rights)?

A:

12.3.4. Filed Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you intend to use file management to control the loan process (e.g. have all the
required documents been received?), or merely to archive the filed documents?

A:

Q: 2) What kind of documents do you have to administer?

A:

12.3.5. Condition Structure

Questions:

Q: 1) Which different condition structures do you use (annuities, installments, final
repayment)? To which product categories do they apply?

A:

Q: 2) What are the resulting condition types (nominal interest, annuity repayment,
commitment interest)?

A:

Q: 3) To what extent do you manage variable-rate loans? Which loans are they?

A:

Q: 4) How do you adjust the conditions for loans due to expire (rollover)? Do you send
contract offers or contracts to the customer? Do you apply standard conditions or grant
individual conditions?

A:

Q: 5) Which effective interest method do you use?

A:

Q: 6) How do you deal with loan discounts and premiums?

A:

12.4. Market Risk Management

Questions:

Q: 1) Should valuations be differentiated according to the bid/ask rates?

A:

12.4.1. Reference Interest Rate

Questions:

Q: 1) Which reference interest rates are required?

A:

12.4.2. Yield Curves

Questions:

Q: 1) Which yield curves are required? Which reference interest rates (interfaces) should be
used as a basis for defining the yield curves?

A:

12.4.3. Volatility

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use option instruments? Which?

A:

Q: 2) Do you require your own volatility type for value at risk calculations?

A:

12.4.4. Reporting

Questions:

Q: 1) Which market data parameters are used for position valuation?

A:

Q: 2) Which product types do you want to value differently from the standard?

A:

Q: 3) Which additional flows (such as premiums or charges) do you want to include in the
valuation?

Explanation: For additional flows you use flow category '90'.

A:

12.4.5. Prices/NPVs for OTC Transactions

Questions:

Q: 1) Should the net present values calculated by the system be saved?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to include net present values that have been calculated externally in the
mark-to-market position valuation?

A:

12.4.6. Scenario

Questions:

Q: 1) Which market data simulations do you want to carry out?

A:

12.4.7. Market Data Shift

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate relative changes to market data in your evaluations?

A:

12.4.8. Statistics Type

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations (variance/covariance)?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to calculate your volatilities and correlations?

A:

12.4.9. Correlation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations (variance/covariance)?

A:

12.4.10. Risk Hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations?

A:

Q: 2) Which risk factors do you want to consider for your risk evaluations?

A:

13. Revenue and Cost Controlling
13.1. Overhead Cost Controlling
13.1.1. Cost Element
13.1.1.1. Primary Cost Element

Questions:

Q: 1) Define primary cost elements based on the definition of the chart of account.

A:

Q: 2) Reserve a number range in the chart of accounts for the definition of CO-specific
accounts/primary cost elements: which additional primary cost elements do you need (such
as for accruals)?

A:

13.1.1.2. Secondary Cost Element

Questions:

Q: 1) Define secondary cost elements for planning, allocation and reporting purposes.

A:

13.1.1.3. Cost Element Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Define cost element groups for planning, allocation, and reporting purposes.

A:

13.1.2. Cost Center
13.1.2.1. Cost Center

Questions:

Q: 1) Define cost centers as the lowest level in your organizational structure at which you
hold one person responsible for the expenses incurred (check whether you have covered the
whole organization).

A:

13.1.2.2. Standard Hierarchy for Cost Centers

Questions:

Q: 1) Take your corporate organizational structure and build a hierarchy according to levels
of responsibilities, with cost centers as the lowest level.

A:

13.1.2.3. Cost Center Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Besides the standard hierarchy, do you need other alternative structure (groups) of
cost centers (for planning, allocation, and reporting purposes)?

A:

13.1.3. Activity Type
13.1.3.1. Activity Type

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the type of activity performed by each cost center. Do this by defining one or
more measurable activity type(s) for each cost center.

A:

Q: 2) Since activity types are posted as secondary cost elements, have you specified the
secondary cost elements to which you want to assign the activity type (one-to-one, or one
cost element for more than one activity type)?

A:

13.1.3.2. Activity Type Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Group your activity types into different categories or similar attributes for planning,
allocation and reporting purposes.

A:

13.1.4. Statistical Key Figures
13.1.4.1. Statistical Key Figures

Questions:

Q: 1) Which statistical key figures do you want to use for allocations and reporting (such as
telephone units, headcount, and so on)?

A:

13.1.4.2. Statistical Key Figure Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Define groups of statistical key figures (such as the group for all headcount statistical
figures).

A:

13.1.5. Business Process
13.1.5.1. Business Process

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to define business processes across different areas of your organization
and plan, enter, and allocate overhead costs on the basis of these?


Explanation: Unlike activity types, business processes can receive costs from more than one
cost center. The process costs can then either be allocated to Cost Object Controlling, or to
Profitability Analysis.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Define your business processes (such as sales-order processing).

A:

13.1.5.2. Standard Hierarchy for Business Processes

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the standard hierarchy of processes for planning, allocating and reporting
business process costs.

A:

13.1.5.3. Business Process Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you group your business processes alternatively by categories or similar attributes
so that you can plan, allocate and report on aggregated levels?

A:

13.1.6. Internal Order

Questions:

Q: 1) What business criteria do you use to classify your internal orders (for example,
overhead orders, accrual orders, investment orders, statistical orders, and so on)?

A:

Q: 2) What are the types of orders that will be used in the controlling area (such as
investments, marketing, etc.)?

A:

Q: 3) Should some of the orders be used for information purposes only - that is, should the
real posting be on the cost center?

A:

13.2. Product Cost Controlling
13.2.1. Procurement Alternative

Questions:

Q: 1) Are you working with multiple supply sources (different vendors) or multiple production
methods (in-house production and subcontracting) for the same material?


A:

13.2.2. Cost Component

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the structure of your product cost components (40 cost components max)!

A:

Q: 2) Which cost components should be part of the product`s standard price?

A:

Q: 3) Define the calculation method for each cost component.

Explanation: Define the calculation method for each cost component: 1. Activity quantity x
activity price 2. Material quantity x price (standard price, moving average price, purchasing
info record......) 3. Process quantity x process price 4. Percentage overhead

A:

Q: 4) Do you require an alternative structure that breaks down the activity and process
costs in accordance with their original costs (such as wages, salaries, energy, depreciation)?

A:

Q: 5) Which cost components should be part of the product's cost of goods manufactured in
Profitability Analysis?

A:

13.2.3. Product Cost Collectors

Questions:

Q: 1) If you are working with period-based controlling, do you want to have one cost
collector for each production method or for each material?

A:

13.2.4. Material Ledger Data

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you intend to value the material with more than one currency or valuation
approach? What are those currencies/approaches?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to make subsequent allocations of variances (from purchasing,
production) for raw materials and material produced in-house?

A:


Q: 3) Do you want to differentiate between procurement alternatives and manufacturing
processes for your actual costs?

A:

13.3. Profitability Analysis
13.3.1. Characteristics
13.3.1.1. Characteristic Definition

Questions:

Q: 1) List the dimensions (characteristics) that you want to create contribution margin
accounting for, according to your reporting requirements.

Explanation: Examples of characteristics: - Region - Sales organization - ...

A:

13.3.1.2. Characteristic Values

Questions:

Q: 1) For the characteristics defined in the previous question, specify values (such as,
regions: North, west, east, south)

A:

13.3.1.3. Characteristic Derivation

Questions:

Q: 1) List the terms (characteristics) that do not have master data, and state how they are
dependent on other criteria.

A:

Q: 2) List the terms (characteristics) that are dependent on each other in a hierarchy.

Explanation: Examples: Determine sales office, region

A:

13.3.2. Value Fields
13.3.2.1. Definition of Value Fields

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the report rows (value fields) that you wish to analyze.

A:

Q: 2) Are you interested only in the revenues and costs that are directly related to product
sales?

A:

Q: 3) Do you also wish to see other product-related overhead costs?

A:

Q: 4) Do you also wish to see other income or expenditures that are not related to your
regular business activity (e.g. product production or sales)?

A:

Q: 5) Decide which value fields can be posted as reconcilable with FI (true), and which are
to be filled with accrual valuations.

A:

13.3.3. Condition Types
13.3.3.1. Definition of Condition Types

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want information on accrued values for your result information, that are not
defined as conditions in SD, or do you require user-defined condition types in CO-PA for
planning purposes?

A:

14. Enterprise Controlling

14.1. Consolidation
14.1.1. Consolidation Chart of Acounts / FS Item Hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chart
of accounts (US GAAP, IAS, HGB)?

Explanation: Several FS items can be used within one dimension. Therefore financial
statements can be created parallel according to different requirements.

A:

Q: 2) Should retained earnings be disclosed in the balance sheet or in the income
statement?

A:

Q: 3) Should income statements be created using cost-of-sales accounting or period
accounting?

Explanation: ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! ATTENTION:
then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary!


A:

Q: 4) Do you summarize your operational accounts to group accounts (financial statement
items)?

A:

Q: 5) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level?

Explanation: How is the data reported - on account level or item level? How is the data
reported - on account level or item level?

A:

Q: 6) Do you require further freely definable classifications for your FS items?

Explanation: The illustration of such classifications takes place via the field "item category".
Characteristic values would be for example "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".
sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".

A:

Q: 7) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/L
chart of accounts or a financial statement version.

Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the
unit integration. the unit integration.

A:

Q: 8) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for posting
deferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancing
adjustment.

Explanation: ANI Balance sheet ANI Income statement Deferred income task balance sheet
Deferred income task income statement FS balancing adjustment item Unappropriated
retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings

A:

14.1.2. Breakdown Categories

Questions:

Q: 1) How many breakdown categories can be derived from your reporting system? Which
different details would you like to see within a consolidation chart of accounts?

Explanation: The requested detail of FS items is controlled via the breakdown category. The
details are delivered in standard by: - Partner - Transaction currency - Year of acquisition -
Subitem - if necessary up to 5 further custom characteristics - if necessary up to 5 further
custom characteristics

A:


Q: 2) Do you want to differentiate elimination differences between currency-related and
other differences?

Explanation: The split differences requires the detail of a FS item by transaction currency.
currency.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

14.1.3. Custom Characteristics

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need further custom characteristics, in addition to the standard
subassignments?

Explanation: Note: - cross-client setting - as the data base is to be extended, these settings
should occur at beginning of the project (empty data base required) - subsequent changes
are extremely problematic

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes how many and which characteristics?

Explanation: Number of characteristics: Which characteristic values:

A:

14.1.4. Subitem Category

Questions:

Q: 1) Which standard subassignments would you like to use? What requirements do you
have for group reporting later on, for example, asset history sheets, equity aging reports,
segment reports, etc. ?

Explanation: For example to choose from: - Asset transaction type - Functional area - Region
- Year of acquisition - Period - Equity transaction type - Equity transaction type

A:

14.1.5. Subitem

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you want to define the subitems?

Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - Subitem category asset
transaction type numerical characteristic value 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your own
characteristic values? Or do you want to use your own characteristic values?

A:


Q: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?

A:

14.1.6. Sets (Namespace)

Questions:

Q: 1) Define suitable name spaces for the sets you use.

Explanation: Sets are aggregations of context-releated elements. Sets are needed in all
kinds of areas, such as data collection, currency translation, interunit elimination and
reporting. You can make life easier by using suitable set names when defining sets.

A:

15. Asset Accounting

Questions:

Q: 1) How many fixed assets and how many assets under construction do you currently
have?

A:

Q: 2) Which organizational units do you manage in the asset master record?

A:

Q: 3) Do you want asset master record numbering to be internally or externally assigned?

A:

Q: 4) Do you see a business need to use both internal and external number assignment,
depending on the asset class? If so, please specify.

A:

Q: 5) If you use external number assignment, do you want to allow the assignment of
alphanumeric numbers?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you want to represent asset components using asset sub-numbers? If so, for what
purposes do you plan to use asset sub-numbers?

A:

Q: 7) Are cost centers (business areas) to be defined in the asset master record on a time-
dependent basis?

A:

Q: 8) Do you see a business need to create multiple similar asset master records in one
step?

A:

Q: 9) Do you have assets that require increased depreciation due to multiple shift use?

A:

Q: 10) In your enterprise, is there a requirement to shut down an asset (discontinue
depreciation) for a period of time?

A:

Q: 11) How do you archive your asset master records at the present time?

A:

Q: 12) How long do you intend to continue to manage assets, which are no longer on hand
physically, in the system?

A:

16. Personnel Administration
16.1. Bases

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to assign your own employee numbers or have the system generate
them for you? SAP recommends the use of system generated employee numbers after the
initial data conversion.

A:

Q: 2) With the use of third-party archiving systems, SAP allows you to store documents (eg
photographs, resumes, position description forms) for employee level. If you are using this
facility, which documents will be stored?

A:

Q: 3) For which infotypes or reports should an audit trail be set up?

Explanation: It is possible to automatically record all changes made to infotypes (screens of
related nformation) and when reports have been initiated via a log file.Typically, this facility is
switched on to record changes to sensitive data for audit purposes. Sometimes this facility is
also switched on for other infotypes to check for common errors in the post go-live period. the
post go-live period.

A:

Q: 4) SAP allows you to maintain a free-text screen for all infotypes. Do you have the
requirement to store free text?

A:

16.2. Employee's Personal Details
16.2.1. Personal Data

Questions:

Q: 1) When you record employee names, which forms-of-address, titles, name
prefixes/affixes (eg BSc, Sir) do you use and how do you want them displayed on reports and
correspondance?

A:

Q: 2) When recording employee details, which other particulars (eg marital status,
nationality) do you wish to record?

A:

16.2.2. Challenge

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you record challenges (physical, mental) for your employees?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) If you are required to record the type of challenge, which types do you track?

A:

16.2.3. Addresses

Questions:

Q: 1) What address types would you like to maintain for your employees (eg permanent,
postal)?

A:

16.2.4. Bank Details

Questions:

Q: 1) Which methods of payment are allowed in your organization?

Explanation: It is necessary to define a method of payment (eg direct payment, cheque) for
each employee being paid. The method of payment can be defined globally for all employees

or a different method for each country. If the direct payment option is to be used, consider
uploading the banks from disk. the banks from disk.

A:

16.2.5. Family/Related Persons

Questions:

Q: 1) What relationships with other persons do you wish to maintain for your employees (eg
spouse, child, guardian, emergency contact, friend)?

A:

Q: 2) Are relations included in the calculation of private health insurance?

A:

16.2.6. Education and Training

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the types of educational establishments (eg secondary school, university,
internal course) for which you want to record your employees' certificates.

A:

Q: 2) List the types of certificates which you would want to attach to employees.

A:

Q: 3) Identify which branches of study (eg subjects, course name) are to be recorded
against employees.

A:

16.2.7. Other/Previous Employers

Questions:

Q: 1) If you wish to record previous employment history for your new employees, list which
Industry and Jobs you require.

A:

16.2.8. Qualifications

Questions:

Q: 1) If you are not using the qualifications catalogue within Personnel Development (PD),
list the qualifications (eg languages, skills) you would like to record for employees.

A:

16.2.9. Appraisals

Questions:

Q: 1) In SAP you have the ability to record appraisals in either PA or PD. If you intend to
record appraisal ratings in PA, which types of performance criteria (eg Leadership,
Communication) and weightings do you require?

A:

16.2.10. Membership Fees

Questions:

Q: 1) List the entities against which employees may pay membership (eg health club, union
dues, professional organizations).

A:

Q: 2) List the payee organizations for these membership fees.

A:

Q: 3) In your company, how are membership fees calculated?

Explanation: You can, for example, calculate the union dues as a percentage of a
predetermined assessment base. This procedure takes minimum and maximum limits into
account. Alternatively, you can determine a fixed amount.

A:

16.2.11. Communications Data

Questions:

Q: 1) Which user identification numbers are to be recorded against your employees?

Explanation: You may record user identification numbers for various electronic media (eg
internet, fax) or company credit card numbers against each of your employees. employees.

A:

16.2.12. Stat.of Res.Perm. CH

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan to register and manage information regarding the statuses of your foreign
employees' residence permits?

A:

Q: 2) If yes, which types of residence permits do your employees hold?

A:
16.2.13. Registration of country of birth (act
stim.lab.part.ethn.minorities) NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization send this (statutory) statement to the Chamber of Commerce?

A:

Q: 2) Which employee categories do you wish to discern (education and job grade)?

A:

16.2.14. Additional Personal Data CA, SG, US

Questions:

Q: 1) SAP has the facility to record both ethnicity, Vietnam-related military service and
military reserve status. Does your company record any of this information and if applicable,
what ethnic groups are required?

A:

16.3. Information About Work Relationship
16.3.1. Organizational Assignment

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to group your employees for security or reporting purposes according to
who administers their personnel records, payroll data or time data? If so, provide a list of
Administrators for personnel records, for payroll data and for time data.

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to use a service type catalog?

Explanation: The service type is an activity-based classification of employees. For example,
this is defined for hospitals in the Accounting Regulations for Hospitals
(Krankenhausbuchfhrungsverordnung). In addition to activity-based account determination,
the service type can be used for statistical purposes. can be used for statistical purposes. can
be used for statistical purposes.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Which service type catalog do you use?

A:

Q: 4) You should answer the following questions if your accounting system uses Funds
Management.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Would you like to work with commitments for personnel expenditure?


Explanation: Commitments are budget assignments that are created before the actual
postings. Commitments are used to reserve funds for future expenditure.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

16.3.2. Planned Working Time

Questions:

Q: 1) This infotype is used to store the planned working time (work schedule rules). See
Time Management questionnaire.

A:

16.3.3. Contract Elements

Questions:

Q: 1) What types of employee contracts are used in your organization?

A:

Q: 2) If you wish to record periods of notice which must be given by either the employee or
employer, list the standard notice periods.

A:

Q: 3) If you wish to record the start date of service worked in affiliated or acquired
companies, list the allowable standard corporations.

A:

Q: 4) Do you have employees who receive continued pay in case of illness in accordance
with the standard rules valid until June 30, 1994?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Cules son los tipos de contrato laboral que se emplean en su organizacin?

A:

Q: 6) En qu momento se realiza la impresion del contrato? Se quiere imprimir el
contrato desde dentro del sistema?

A:

Q: 7) Se incluyen clausulas adicionales y variables entre contratos al texto?

A:

Q: 8) Existen periodos de prueba para los empleados recien incorporados a la empresa?
Describir duracin del periodo y proceso.

A:

Q: 9) Se realizan contratos a tiempo parcial? Describir los casos.

A:

16.3.4. Internal Medical Service

Questions:

Q: 1) What medical examinations (eg audiometric, general habits, vision) would you like to
record for your employees?

A:

Q: 2) For each medical examination, list the specific tests or areas for which you want to
record medical data.

A:

Q: 3) For each specific test or area, detail the typical results (eg Y/N, x cm, blood type) you
might want to record.

A:

Q: 4) For each occurrence of a medical examination, what overall results (eg fit for work)
would you like to record?

A:

16.3.5. Monitoring of Dates

Questions:

Q: 1) SAP allows you to monitor and to report on the expiration of certain key events (eg
probation, work permit, medical examination). Which key events do you wish to record?

A:

16.3.6. Powers of Attorney

Questions:

Q: 1) List the different types of powers of attorney (or similar instruments) which can be
recorded against your employees.

A:

16.3.7. Date Specifications

Questions:

Q: 1) What key dates do you want to record against your employees?


Explanation: What are the key dates you want to record against employees that are used for
evaluations? Some of these dates may differ to another similar date recorded elsewhere in
the system (eg a hire date for purposes of leave accruals, hire date for service anniversary).

A:

Q: 2) Do you have additional, payroll-relevant key dates that differ from the actual entry
date?

Explanation: Differing key dates occur when a time before employment in the current
company is taken into account. Typical examples include: Typical examples include: -Key
date for severance pay -Key date for leave -Continued remuneration -Continued
remuneration

A:

16.3.8. Employment Periods - Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Stellen Sie eine Liste der Dienstzeiten bereit, die Sie bei der Ermittlung der
ruhegehaltfhigen Dienstzeiten bercksichtigen mssen.

A:

Q: 2) Stellen Sie die Bescheinigung zur Festsetzung des Ruhegehaltssatzes zur Verfgung.

A:

16.3.9. Internal Data

Questions:

Q: 1) This infotype records internal data on each employee (eg previous personnel number,
work center information). Which of these elements will your company record?

A:

16.3.10. Statistics

Questions:

Q: 1) SAP gives you the ability to store and evaluate user-defined statistics (eg size of
safety equipment). What statistics do you need to maintain for your employees?

A:

16.3.11. German Civil Service Statistics

Questions:

Q: 1) Which of these statistics do you use?

A:
16.3.12. Corporate Function

Questions:

Q: 1) List the different organizational roles (do not confuse with positions and jobs) which
can be assigned to your employees.

Explanation: These roles are typically cross-functional and not necessarily related to a
person#s primary position (eg first aid officer, sexual haressment officer).

A:

16.3.13. Company Instructions

Questions:

Q: 1) List the standard instructions or other activities (eg high voltage switching, orientation,
recognition award) which you might want to record against an employee.

A:

16.3.14. Objects on Loan

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to record the loan of company property (eg PCs, mobile telephones) and
an identifying number against employees? If so, list these items.

A:

16.3.15. Grievances CA, US

Questions:

Q: 1) If you track grievances, disciplinary actions or harassment incidents on employees,
provide a list of each type and a detailed description of the business process.

A:

16.3.16. Residence Status CA, US

Questions:

Q: 1) This infotype is used to maintain Residence Status information and information
needed to track I-9 data. List any identification documents your company needs to track.

A:

16.3.17. External Agencies NL

Questions:

Q: 1) With which UVI or UVIs are you registered?

Explanation: NOTE: The 'employment status' and 'shift type' can be reported on from the
infotype or from the report parameters. NOTE: The various CBS wage elements must be
linked to the SAP wage type catalogue.

A:


16.3.18. CBS NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization submit this statement?

A:

Q: 2) With which frequency do you submit statements?

A:

16.4. Payroll Specifications
16.4.1. Basic Pay

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your pay structure.

Explanation: The company's pay structure can be defined in either Compensation or
Personnel Administration. A pay structure is comprised of a Type (eg industrial agreement),
Area (eg region), Group (eg grade) and Level (scale). This can be achived in a variety of
ways (eg industry, agreement, region). agreement, region).

A:

Q: 2) Provide details of any groups of employees for whom automatic assignment to pay
scale structure is appropriate?

Explanation: It is possible to automatically update an employee's pay scale group or level for
a set period depending on your business rules (ie age and time-related increases). time-
related increases).

A:

Q: 3) Will your company perform global salary increases and, if so, provide the details?

Explanation: You can also make global salary increases for specific groups of employees
based on different methods (eg a set amount, a percentage). This can be achived in either
Compensation or Personnel Administration. Note: If a global salary increase is required
shortly after your go-live date, be aware of the effort required to complete this task. go-live
date, be aware of the effort required to complete this task.

A:

Q: 4) In your company, how is extra payment for overtime beyond that specified by the
collective agreement represented?

Explanation: You can deposit the overtime payment in a separate wage type. This prohibits
changes in the collective agreement from having an effect on overtime payments.

A:

Q: 5) How are lump-sum payments for overtime represented in your company?

Explanation: You can register an agreement that includes overtime or a separate part of the
salary with either a fixed number of hours or a fixed amount that covers all hours.

A:

Q: 6) Do you use a case group catalog to define the payments? If so, give details here.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) Definir los convenios colectivos a los que estn adscritos los empleados de la
empresa.

A:

Q: 8) Definir las distintas categorias y subcategorias profesionales establecidas en
convenio.

A:

Q: 9) Listar los conceptos de nmina que dependen de las categorias profesionales
establecidas en convenio.

A:

Q: 10) Existen nivelaciones automticas por convenio (por ejemplo saltos de categoria en
funcin de la antigedad)?

A:

Q: 11) Defina en qu bases de valoracin de deben incluir las cc-nminas del infotipo
Emolumentos Bsicos.

A:

Q: 12) Indique cules son las cc-nminas que componen el sueldo fijo.

A:

Q: 13) Defina cules son los haberes que se acumulan para el pago del plus por zona
desfavorable.

A:

Q: 14) Cules son los tipos de contrato que existen en la empresa?

A:


16.4.2. Family-Related Bonuses - PSG

Questions:

Q: 1) Sollen die Ortszuschlagsbestandteile maschinell ermittelt werden ?

Explanation: Family-related bonuses include different child and spousal elements. Family-
related bonuses include different child and spousal elements.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you also require the child increase amount for the special bonus?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Wollen Sie im Versorgungsfall die Kinderbestandteile dem Berechtigten zuweisen?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

16.4.3. External Transfers

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization provide savings schemes? If so, which ones?

A:

Q: 2) SAP has Infotypes for making specific payments to third parties on behalf of
employees (eg Loans, Garnishments, Membership Fees). Which additional payments to third
parties do you require?

A:

16.4.4. Tax

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of: special employee groups (e.g. artists?)
conversion rules green table and/or holiday

A:

Q: 2) Group together your personnel areas/subareas to employment tax permanent
establishments.

Explanation: Die lohnsteuerliche Betriebssttte ist der Personalbereich/-teilbereich, der -
als Absender fr die Lohnsteueranmeldung verwendet wird - als Arbeitgeber auf der
Lohnsteuerbescheinigung steht - das Kirchensteuergebiet bestimmt.

A:


Q: 3) Create a list of Tax Offices for your permanent establishments.

Explanation: The address and tax number are required.

A:

Q: 4) Which tax procedure do you want to use to tax regular payments?

Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen: - Besteuerung nach Monatstabelle - Besteuerung mit
Permanenz - Besteuerung mit Permanenz

A:

Q: 5) After which payroll period do you want to create employment tax statements?

A:

Q: 6) Which flat-rate taxation options do you want to use?

Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen folgende Mglichkeiten: - Regelungen fr Aushilfen nach
40a EStG (kurzfristig Beschftigte und geringfgig Entlohnte) - Regelungen fr
beschrnkt Steuerpflichtige nach 50a EStG - Regelungen fr einzelne Bezge nach 40
und 40b EStG (z.B. Essensgeld, Fahrgeld, Zukunftssicherungsleistungen)

A:

Q: 7) What procedure do you want to use for collecting flat-rate church tax?

Explanation: Die pauschale Kirchensteuer kann entweder - fr alle Mitarbeiter mit einem
ermigten Hebesatz oder - nur fr die kirchensteuerpflichtigen Mitarbeiter mit dem
normalen Satz erhoben werden.

A:

Q: 8) Which special tax procedures do you want to use?

Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen folgende Verfahren: - Steuerbefreiung aufgrund von
Doppelbesteuerungsabkommen - Steuerbefreiung aufgrund von Auslandsttigkeitserlassen
- Steuerbefreiung aufgrund von Grenzgngerregelungen - Arbeitskammern
Bremen/Saarland - Arbeitskammern Bremen/Saarland

A:

Q: 9) Which employment tax tables are used?

A:

Q: 10) Se contemplan pagos en especie a los empleados? Describir cules son y su
proceso.

A:

Q: 11) En el caso de realizar pagos en especie se realizan ingresos a cuenta no
repercutidos?

A:

Q: 12) Se realizan pagos variables a los empleados?

A:

16.4.5. Social Insurance

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of the employee insurance statement? If so, which
one?

A:

Q: 2) Does your organization provide a private health insurance scheme? If so, please
specify.

A:

Q: 3) Which calculation method is applicable to the SI schemes?

A:

Q: 4) Which calculation method is applicable to the SI days?

A:

Q: 5) How many different contribution percentages are applicable to each SI scheme?

A:

Q: 6) Does your organization provide additional SI schemes (e.g. ANW gap, early
retirement, etc.)? If so, which ones?

A:

Q: 7) Create a list of all the state health insurance funds used in your enterprise.

Explanation: Achten Sie auf folgende Kriterien: - Bezeichnung der Krankenkasse und deren
Geschftsstellen - Anschriften und Bankangaben bei den Geschftsstellen - Betriebsnummer
und Rechtskreis (Ost/West) Beachten Sie, da berregionale Krankenkassen zweimal
angelegt werden mssen, wenn Sie Betriebe in verschiedenen Rechtskreisen haben.
Anhand des Rechtskreises der Krankenkasse wird in der Abrechnung die entsprechende
Beitragsbemessungsgrenze fr KV und PV verwendet. - Prozentstze und Beitragsklassen -
Prozentstze und Beitragsklassen

A:


Q: 8) Do you pay contributions to private HI funds or industry-related pension
organizations?

Explanation: Falls nein, d.h. alle Privatversicherten sind Selbstzahler, gengt es, eine
Privatkasse fr alle anzulegen, da dann keine Anschriften und Bankangaben notwendig sind.
Ansonsten stellen Sie die Informationen analog zu den gesetzlichen Krankenkassen bereit.
Krankenkassen bereit.

A:

Q: 9) Which bonus calculation procedure do you use for employees voluntarily insured in a
statutory health insurance fund?

Explanation: Wenn die gesetzliche Krankenkasse den Beitrag fr freiwillig Versicherte
anhand von Beitragsklassen erhebt, haben Sie eine Wahlmglichkeit bei der Berechnung des
Zuschusses. Sie mssen als Zuschu mindestens die Hlfte des Betrags zahlen, welcher
sich aus dem Prozentsatz multipliziert mit der Beitragsbemessungsgrenze ergibt. Sie knnen,
ohne da ein geldwerter Vorteil entsteht, auch die Hlfte des Beitrags zahlen, der sich aus
der Beitragsklasse ergibt.

A:

Q: 10) Are there company areas in your enterprise for which contributions have to be paid?

Explanation: Erstellen Sie eine Liste der Betriebsteile und den zugeordneten Umlagekassen
mit den Prozentstzen fr Umlage 1 und Umlage 2.

A:

Q: 11) Do you make use of the option of sending contribution statements to a federal
association instead of individual HI funds?

Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der Bundesverbnde mit ihren Anschriften,
Bankangaben und Betriebsnummern.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you plan to send your contribution statements via EDI?

Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der DF-fhigen Krankenkassen mit Ihren
Anschriften und Betriebsnummern. Diese DF-Kassen sollen als eigene Krankenkassen
hinterlegt werden.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 13) Put together a list of the personnel areas/subareas, that could be senders of
statements of contributions paid


Explanation: Ordnen Sie alle Personalbereiche/-teilbereiche diesen Absendern zu.

A:

Q: 14) Create a list of all combinations of senders and receiving offices for the contribution
statements.

Explanation: Absender sind die absendenden Personalbereiche/-teilbereiche,
Annahmestellen sind entweder die Krankenkassen, Bundesverbnde oder DF-Kassen. Fr
jede Kombination wird die Kontonummer bzw. die Zahlstellennummer bentigt. Vermerken
Sie in der Liste, welche Krankenkassen auf Bundesverbnde bzw. DF-Kassen umgelenkt
werden sollen.

A:

Q: 15) Give an overview of the social security constellations legal in your enterprise.

Explanation: Beispiele hierfr sind: - Arbeiter - Angestellte - Pflicht/Freiwillig/Privatversicherte
- Geringverdiener - Geringfgig Beschftigte - Kurzfristig Beschftigte - Auszubildende -
Praktikanten - Mitarbeiter, welche ein freiwilliges soziales Jahr leisten - Altersteilzeitler -
Rentner - Versorgungsempfnger - Beamte

A:

Q: 16) Listar los epgrafes a los que estn adscritos los empleados.

A:

Q: 17) En qu grupos de cotizacin se agrupan los empleados?

A:

16.4.6. Loans

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way are unscheduled repayments dealt with?

A:

Q: 2) Does your organization provide (interest-bearing/interest-free) loans? If so, which
ones? please specify the (repayment) conditions.

A:

Q: 3) Which types of loans do you offer your employees?

Explanation: You can differ between annuity repayment or repayment in installments.

A:


16.4.7. Garnishment

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of garnishment of wages? If so, please specify.

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to calculate garnishments automatically or transfer them manually?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Do You Want to Group Together Some of Your Recipients to Recipient Keys?

Explanation: Die Pfndung ermglicht es, bestimmte Empfnger, die hufig als Glubiger
auftreten, im System unter einem Schlssel zu hinterlegen (z.B. Versandhuser, Banken).
Die Bankverbindung dieser Empfnger kann dann zentral administriert werden.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 4) Do You Want to Group Together Some of Your Creditors to Creditor Keys?

Explanation: Die Pfndung ermglicht es, bestimmte Glubiger im System unter einem
Schlssel zu hinterlegen (z.B. Versandhuser, Banken). Die Anschriften dieser Glubiger
knnen dann zentral administriert werden.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you charge your employees for garnishment processing?

Explanation: Sie knnen auch unterschiedliche Berechnungsregeln (abhngig z.B. vom
zugehrigen Personalbereich) im System definieren.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

16.4.8. Pension

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization provide (company) pension schemes? If so, which ones?

A:

16.4.9. Family Allowance AT

Questions:

Q: 1) Do your employees receive family allowances?

A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

16.4.10. One Time Pay. Off-Cy. CA, US

Questions:

Q: 1) List all one time payments for employees (eg bonuses).

A:

16.4.11. Payroll Outsourcing CA, US

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your company outsource payroll processing?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) If so, to what extent (eg tax processing, check printing)

A:
16.4.12. Deduction Limits CA, US

Questions:

Q: 1) List all deductions that have a maximum amount to be taken (eg united way, 401K
loans).

A:

16.4.13. Capital Formation (Germany)

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of ER bonuses granted in your enterprise for capital formation.

A:

Q: 2) What special features exist when calculating ER bonuses for capital formation?

Explanation: Mgliche Besonderheiten: - Anteilige Berechnung nach dem
Beschftigungsgrad des Mitarbeiters - Krzung durch Abwesenheiten - Bercksichtigung
der Betriebszugehrigkeit - Bercksichtigung von Einkommensgrenzen - Bercksichtigung
von Einkommensgrenzen

A:

Q: 3) Create a list of the recipients of your employee's capital formation agreements.

Explanation: Necessary payee data: - Name and address of payee - Country of bank -
Sort code - Bank account number

A:


16.4.14. DUEVO (Germany)

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of personnel areas/subareas, which could be senders of DEUEV
notifications

Explanation: Ordnen Sie Personalbereiche/-teilbereiche den Absendern zu.

A:

Q: 2) Specify a receiving office and forwarding office for each of the health fund types you
use.

Explanation: Payee funds are stored in the system as special health insurance funds.

A:

Q: 3) Do you intend transferring DEUEV notifications by EDI?

Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der DF-fhigen Krankenkassen mit Ihren
Anschriften und Betriebsnummern. Diese DF-Kassen sollen als eigene Krankenkassen
hinterlegt werden. Fr die Kommunikation mit den DF-fhigen Annahmestellen wird eine
Zusatzsoftware (KKS - Krankenkassenkommunikationssystem) bentigt.

A:

Q: 4) Do you want to start using SAP Payroll mid-year?

Explanation: SAP empfiehlt den Produktivstart im Januar. Wenn Sie unterjhrig starten
wollen mssen Sie fr Ihre Mitarbeiter eine Abmeldung (vom Altsystem) und eine Anmeldung
(im SAP-System) vornehmen.

A:

Q: 5) Choose a procedure for the DEUEV start.

Explanation: Es stehen zwei Verfahren zur Verfgung: a) bernahme der
Abwesenheitsdaten der Mitarbeiter fr die letzten beiden Monate vor Produktivstart aus dem
Altsystem. b) Kennzeichnen der Mitarbeiter, fr die das Altsystem eine DEV-Abmeldung
oder -Unterbrechungsmeldung erstellt hat.

A:

16.4.15. Company Insurance (Germany)

Questions:

Q: 1) Which procedure do you want to use to transfer the company insurance premium?


Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen: - Sammelberweisung (manuell ber
Lohnartennnachweis) - Einzelberweisungen (durch Angabe der Empfngerdaten)

A:

Q: 2) Create a list of company insurance recipients.

Explanation: Required data are: - Name and address of payee - Bank details (country, sort
code and account number) - Bank details (country, sort code and account number)

A:

16.4.16. CF/SPI Data DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) With which supplementary pension funds are you a member?

Explanation: Provide a list with the following information: - Name and address of
supplementary pension fund (SPF) - Bank details for SPF - Membership number -
Contribution rates - Registration number - Format for insurance number - Contribution
assessment thresholds - Contribution assessment thresholds

A:

Q: 2) Which pay elements are subject to contributions?

A:

Q: 3) Is flat-rate taxation of contributions permitted? If so, to what amount? Do you use the
average method? Do you use annual or monthly taxation?

A:

Q: 4) Is the bonus subject to contributions? Is the bonus reduced with the contribution
months?

Explanation: Ist nur fr einen Teil der Monate des Jahres Umlage gezahlt worden, ist die
Zuwendung ggf. nur fr diesen Anteil zu verbeitragen. fr diesen Anteil zu verbeitragen.

A:

Q: 5) Is an increased assessment threshold used in the bonus month?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Ist im Fall von Wehrdienst oder Krankengeldzuschuzeiten ein fiktives Urlaubsbrutto
als zu verbeitragendes Entgelt anzusetzen?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Q: 7) If this case occurs during a month, are the actual gross elements still taken into
account?

Explanation: In this special case, the fictitious gross amount is used as the basis for the
contribution calculation for the whole payroll period. The real gross payments due for the paid
partial period are not taken into account in the contribution calculation. into account in the
contribution calculation.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you use the notification procedure for the DATUEV-ZVE?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 9) Which insurance types occur in your enterprise?

A:

Q: 10) Stellen Sie die Datensatzbeschreibung der von Ihnen erstellten ZVK-Meldungen zur
Verfgung. Welche Felder sind zu fllen?

A:

Q: 11) Name the key day for the difference notifications.

A:

16.4.17. Official Housing DE Publuc Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Provide the table for the calculation of the maximum official housing remuneration.

A:

Q: 2) Which pay elements are included in the official housing gross amount?

A:

Q: 3) Which family-related bonus elements are included in the official housing gross
amount?

A:

Q: 4) Prepare a list of official houses.

Explanation: The following information is required: - Name - Address - Local rental value -
Taxable rental value - Flat-rate for ancilliary costs - Flat-rate for ancilliary costs

A:

16.4.18. Personnel Accommodation DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Prepare a list of staff accommodations.

Explanation: The following information is required: - Description - Address - Value class -
Area - Number of persons - If applicable, percentage deduction due to deficits - Washing
machine available (not coin operating) - Washing machine available (not coin operating)

A:

Q: 2) Welche Mitarbeiterkreise unterliegen der 15%-Regel?

A:
16.4.19. Non-Monetary Remuneration - PSG

Questions:

Q: 1) Which are the non-monetary remuneration values, for example, meals,
accommodations?

A:

16.4.20. Benefits Payment DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Werden Sie den Ruhegehaltssatz (Auswertung ruhegehaltfhiger Dienstzeiten) mit
dem R/3- System festsetzen?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Will you calculate the pension payments using the SAP System?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Provide a list of pensionable pay elements.

A:

Q: 4) Welche Arten von Anrechnungen/Ruhensregelungen finden Anwendung?

A:

Q: 5) Which method do you use for the pension adjustment?

A:

Q: 6) Nehmen Sie an dem Datentrgeraustauschverfahren des Postrentendienstes teil?


Explanation: If yes, provide a list of the payroll numbers you require. If yes, provide a list of
the payroll numbers you require.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) Are the pension payments you pay reimbursed by a third party?

Explanation: If yes, provide a list.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

16.4.21. Sideline Job DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Provide a list of sideline jobs.

A:

16.4.22. Previous Employment Periods DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Nutzen Sie fr Hhergruppierungen den Bewhrungs-/Fallgruppenaufstieg?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Sind im Zusammenhang mit dem Bewhrungsaufstieg Vordienstzeiten zu
bercksichtigen?

A:

16.4.23. Rehabilitants DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Welche Art von Rehabilitanden haben Sie (Paragraphen SGB)?

A:

Q: 2) Welche Rehabilitationsmamahmen gibt es, welche SV-Bestandteile werden
abgefhrt und welche werden vom Arbeitsamt erstattet?

A:

Q: 3) Stellen Sie eine Liste der Arbeitsmter bereit.

Explanation: The following information is required: - Employment office number - Address -
Address

A:

Q: 4) Nennen Sie die Bankverbindung fr die Erstattung.

A:

Q: 5) Wie werden diese Betrge gebucht?

Explanation: This is taxable depending on the employment office. This is taxable depending
on the employment office.

A:

16.4.24. Semiretirement DE

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have semi-retired employees with different models? Describe these models.

Explanation: Denken Sie an folgende Aspekte: - Prozentstze fr Nettoaufstockung -
Prozentstze fr RV-Aufstockung - verblockte/unverblockte Arbeitsphasen -
Lohnartenabhngigkeit, unterschiedliche Bercksichtigung je Modell -
Lohnartenabhngigkeit, unterschiedliche Bercksichtigung je Modell

A:

16.4.25. Additional Income ES

Questions:

Q: 1) Se comtemplan pagos fuera de la nmina que deben quedar reflejados en el informe
190 sobre retenciones. Describa en qu casos.

A:

Q: 2) Realiza pagos dinerarios o en especie por actividades profesionales prestadas por
terceros? Describa estos casos. Describa en qu casos y las claves de percepcin a
emplear.

A:

16.4.26. SI Basic Data JP

Questions:

Q: 1) List the name of Branch Offices for Social Insurance and Labor Insurance.

A:

Q: 2) Assign a social/labor insurance branch office to each personnel subarea.

A:

Q: 3) Define which types of social/labor insurance each employee subgroup needs.


A:

Q: 4) Define social insurance premium rates for each branch office for social/labor
insurance.

A:

Q: 5) Assign the amount and grade of monthly standard compesation to each employee
group/sub group combination.

A:

Q: 6) Does your company have employee's pension fund?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

16.4.27. Residence Tax JP

Questions:

Q: 1) Define employee subgroups liable for residence tax deduction.

A:

Q: 2) Does your company have an office in an ordinance-designated city which determines
the local goverment office to pay the residence tax by the location of the collecter's office?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

16.4.28. Life/Casualty Insurance JP

Questions:

Q: 1) If your company has life/casualty insurance plan, define the names of the insurance
institusions and types. Also define the deduction amount of monthly/bonus payment.

A:

Q: 2) Do you use LINC service?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

16.4.29. Property Accumulation Savings JP

Questions:

Q: 1) If your company has property accumulation savings plan, define the names of the
insurance institutions and types. Also define the deduction amount of monthly/bonus
payment.

A:


16.4.30. Union JP

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your company have labor unions? If so, provide numbers and names.

A:

Q: 2) Define the types of labor union members.

A:

Q: 3) For each labor union, provide union membership fee calculation pattern for both
monthly and bonus payment.

Explanation: - How do you deduct the union memberhip fee? For example, deduction with
fixed rate from basic monthly payment; a given amount per employee; fixed amount as a
union membership fee. employee; fixed amount as a union membership fee.

A:

16.4.31. Commuting Allowance Info. JP

Questions:

Q: 1) Provide information about the commuting types, the date or month of payment,
frequency, the actual goods supplied or not.

A:

16.4.32. Overseas Pay JP

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there overseas assigned employees? If so, provide the payroll method and
pattern for them.

A:

16.4.33. Social Ins. Funds NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization provide any social fund schemes? If so, please specify.

A:

16.4.34. Commuting NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, how does your
organization determine the number of kilometers?

Explanation: NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or depending on address NOTE: Manual
entry, fixed number or depending on address

A:

Q: 2) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, how does your
organization determine the number of days per week?

Explanation: NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or transfer from planned working time
NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or transfer from planned working time

A:

Q: 3) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, for which types of
transportation?

A:

16.4.35. Premium Reduction NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of Premium Reductions (tax and social insurance
payments reductions law)? If so, which ones?

A:

16.4.36. Special Regulations NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of the - Canada regulation?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Does your organization make use of - Delayed payment of wages?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Does your organization make use of - Pension severance?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

16.4.37. Child care NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization provide childcare? If so, please specify.

Explanation: NOTE: Take type of childcare into consideration, who provides care and does
the employee pay a contribution does the employee pay a contribution does the employee
pay a contribution

A:

16.4.38. Unemployment State US

Questions:

Q: 1) List all states that you withhold Unemployment Insurance for.

A:

16.4.39. W-4 Withholding Info. US

Questions:

Q: 1) List all entities that you withhold state tax for.

A:

16.4.40. Withholding Overrides US

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you allow employees to override the standard withholding calculations for taxes?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

16.4.41. IRS Mandates US

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have any IRS Mandates on your employees?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

16.4.42. Tip Indicators US

Questions:

Q: 1) Do any of your employees receive tips as part of compensation?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

17. Personnel Development
17.1. Qualifications / Requirements

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have skills, competencies, qualifications, or requirements in your company? If
you do, you need a qualifications catalog containing a hierachical structure of the
qualifications of interest to your specific company.

A:


Q: 2) How do you evaluate these qualifications/requirements? Maintain the appropriate
scales (e.g. a language scale with the proficiencies 1 through 5).

A:

Q: 3) Are there any alternative qualifications? (e.g. knowledge of AmiPro as an alternative
to knowledge of Word).

A:

Q: 4) For which employees should qualifications be maintained?

A:

Q: 5) For which jobs/positions should requirements be maintained?

A:

Q: 6) Do you perform profile matchups between requirements profiles and qualification
profiles?

A:

Q: 7) If qualification deficits are detected, do you want the system to propose training
measures to rectify the situation?

A:

Q: 8) Do you try to find employees with specific qualifications, or employees suitable for
specific jobs/positions?

A:

Q: 9) Do you want to find qualified applicants for vacant positions?

A:

18. Compensation Management

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have geographical, regional or organizational differences in your pay policy?

A:

Q: 2) For which period do you typically plan your compensation? From which period do you
select your data?

A:


Q: 3) Do you use different ways to define your compensation manager than those defined in
the standard R/3 system?

A:

Q: 4) Which evaluation path do you use to determine which persons in the organizational
unit are to be included in the compensation administration process?

A:

Q: 5) Which plan version is used as the default plan version in Compensation
Management?

A:

Q: 6) Which job evaluation method is most commonly used within your company and should
be used as a default?

A:

Q: 7) Which salary survey method is most commonly used within your company and should
be used as a default?

A:

Q: 8) Which date is used as the key date for the calculation of the annualized base salary?

A:

Q: 9) Which period do you consider to calculate an employees incentive pay for salary
survey reporting purposes?

A:

18.1. Salary Packages

Questions:

Q: 1) How many shares are available under a long-term incentive plan?

A:

18.2. Guidelines

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use different guidelines for different groups of employees?

A:

Q: 2) Which employee criteria do you use to dertermine a guideline group?


A:

Q: 3) How do you determine the distribution of compensation adjustments or long-term
incentives?

A:

Q: 4) Do you use alternative guideline criteria that are not supported by the SAP standard
system (age, length of service, compa ratio, performance results)

A:

Q: 5) What criteria do you use for multidimensional calculation guidelines and how do you
segment them?

A:

18.3. Eligibility Rules

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use different eligibility rules for different groups of employees?

A:

18.4. Adjustments

Questions:

Q: 1) Which wage types do you want to use to update an employees pay information?

A:

Q: 2) Which wage types are the basis for compensation adjustments?

A:

Q: 3) Which compensation wage type do you use for a compensation adjustment?

A:

Q: 4) Do you split your compensation adjustments into more than one wage type? Example:
Do you breakdown your merit increase into two wage types such as inflation adjustment and
salary increase?

A:

Q: 5) Which adjustment types do you use in your company (e.g. merit increase, bonus)? To
which compensation components do they belong (fixed or variable)?

A:


Q: 6) Do you have a formal process to distribute your compensation adjustments
(e.g.annual compensation review)?

A:

18.5. Long-Term Incentives

Questions:

Q: 1) Which events can have an impact on the number of shares available, price, ...?

A:

Q: 2) Which methods of payment does your company allow for long-term incentives?

A:

Q: 3) Which company or employee events may influence the life cycle of a long-term
icentive?

A:

Q: 4) Which rules do you have regarding the availablility of long-term incentives?

A:

Q: 5) Which awards do you offer to your employees?

A:

Q: 6) Which eligibility rule defines the granting of a long-term incentive?

A:

Q: 7) Which wage type do you want to use for a long-term incentive?

A:

Q: 8) Which guidelines defines the distribution of a long-term incentive?

A:

Q: 9) Which and how can a certain life event influence the vesting of a long-term incentive?

A:

Q: 10) Determine the value of a long-term incentive

A:


19. Benefits

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you administer benefits for two or more groups completely separately because of
differences such as the country, the participants are located in, or the currency used for
benefit calculations?

Explanation: Benefit areas are used to group employees by benefits offered, countries and
currencies. Most companies only use one benefit area unless they are administering benefits
in multiple countries or currencies.

A:

Q: 2) Give a short description of each of your organization's benefit plans.

Explanation: What kind of benefit is provided by the plan? Who is going to pay for it? What
happens with the payments? Are dependents or beneficiaries allowed? Are there different
options for a single plan? Which group of employees is eligible for the plan? Does a third
party administrator calculate seniority and/or retirement benefits for any of your plans?
seniority and/or retirement benefits for any of your plans?

A:

Q: 3) Define the set of plan types you need and assign the plans to the types.

Explanation: Each benefit plan has to be assigned to a plan type, which itself belongs to one
of the categories health plans, insurance plans, savings plans, flexible spending accounts,
credit plans, miscellaneous plans, stock purchase plans. An employee can only have one
plan per plan type at a time. at a time.

A:

Q: 4) Do you have grandfathered plans or inactive historical plans?

Explanation: If yes: You can define a plan status, for example, "closed", "locked". If yes: You
can define a plan status, for example, "closed", "locked".

A:

Q: 5) Who are the potential beneficiaries and dependents for your plans? Are there any
other criteria that define the eligibility of related persons?

A:

Q: 6) List your benefit providers.

A:

Q: 7) For each plan, state the plan number (typically group policy or contract number), plan
status (open, locked, closed), and the benefit provider (vendor or carrier).

A:

19.1. Plans
19.1.1. Health plans

Questions:

Q: 1) What dependent coverage levels are available to your employees (for example,
employee only, employee + 1, employee + family)?

A:

Q: 2) For each plan, determine whether the deductions are pre or post tax.

A:

Q: 3) For each plan, define the options the employee can choose.

A:

Q: 4) For each option and dependent coverage, determine which of the following criteria are
necessary to calculate employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age,
salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

Explanation: For each of the plans from the health, insurance, and miscellaneous categories
defined, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate employer and/or
employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary, length of service, any customer
defined criteria.

A:

Q: 5) For each option and dependent coverage, provide the rate tables with appropriate
employee, employer, and/or provider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits.

A:

Q: 6) Do you require any evidence of insurability when covering employees under any
health plan? If so, when is it required?

A:

19.1.2. Insurance plans

Questions:

Q: 1) For each plan, determine whether the deductions are pre or post tax and whether the
plan is relevant for imputed income.

A:



A:

Q: 3) For each of the plans from the insurance and miscellaneous categories defined,
determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the coverage amount:
age, salary, length of service, any customer defined criteria.

A:

Q: 4) For each option, provide the tables with the definition of the coverage amount.

A:

Q: 5) For each option, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate
employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary, seniority, any
customer-defined criteria.

A:

Q: 6) For each option, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/or
provider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits.

A:

provider (vendor or carrier) costs.

A:

Q: 8) Do you require any evidence of insurability when covering employees under any
insurance plan? If so, when is it required?

A:

Q: 9) Are there any coverage limits which involve more than one plan? If so, how are the
limits defined?

A:

19.1.3. Savings plans

Questions:

Q: 1) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the
employee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

A:

Q: 2) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the
employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units.
Also specify whether contributions can be made pre and/or post tax.

A:



A:

employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

A:

Q: 5) For each plan, define the employer contribution as a fixed amount or as a percentage
of the employee contribution.

A:

Q: 6) For each plan, define the vesting schedule (for example, 100% after 5 years of
service).

Explanation: A vesting schedule defines the seniority needed to 'own' the employer
contribution to a savings plan. contribution to a savings plan.

A:

Q: 7) For each plan, list the investment options available to participants (for example,
mutual funds, stock, and so on).

A:

Q: 8) Are any of your savings plans retirement plans? Is it necessary to calculate seniority
for these plans?

Explanation: The SAP System supports the cumulation of pensionable earnings and hours
as well as the storage of seniority information. While projected retirement benefits must be
calculated by a third party administrator, seniority can be calculated either in the SAP System
(partial TPA scenario) or by a third party administrator (full TPA scenario). Describe the
process of calculating seniority and retirement benefits in your organization. In case of a
partial TPA scenario, describe in detail the rules for determining seniority. rules for
determining seniority.

A:

Q: 9) Are there any contribution limits which involve more than one plan? If so, how are the
limits defined?

A:

Q: 10) Are employees' contribution and employers' contribution deducted from periodical
bonus?

A:

19.1.4. Stock purchase plans


Questions:

employee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

A:

Also specify whether contributions can be made pre and/or post tax.

A:


A:

employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

A:

Q: 5) For each plan, define the employer contribution as a fixed amount or as a percentage
of the employee contribution.

A:

Q: 6) For each plan, determine whether contributions are defined on the basis of a regular
period, for example, monthly or as a target amount for a fixed period.

A:

Q: 7) Are employees' contribution and employers' contribution deducted from periodical
bonus?

A:

19.1.5. Spending accounts

Questions:

Q: 1) What do you do with any balance existing either after a termination, or at the close of
the year?

A:

Q: 2) For each spending account, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to
calculate the employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

A:

Q: 3) For each spending account, identify the annual maximum and minimum contribution.


A:

Q: 4) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate
employer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

A:

19.1.6. Credit plans

Questions:

Q: 1) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate
employer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

A:

Q: 2) For each plan, provide the rate tables with appropriate employer credits.

A:

19.1.7. Miscellaneous plans

Questions:

Q: 1) For each plan, decide which of the following attributes are relevant: costs, credits,
coverage, employee contribution, employer contribution, vesting, investments.

A:


A:

Q: 3) If costs are relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to
calculate employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary,
seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

A:

Q: 4) If costs are relevant, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer,
and/or provider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits.

A:

provider (vendor or carrier) costs.

A:

Q: 6) If credits are relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to
calculate employer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

A:


Q: 7) If credits are relevant, provide the rate tables with appropriate employer credits.

A:

Q: 8) If coverage is relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to
calculate the coverage amount: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

A:

Q: 9) If coverage is relevant, provide the tables with the definition of the coverage amount.

A:

Q: 10) If employee contribution is relevant, determine which of the following criteria are
necessary to calculate the employee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer
defined criteria.

A:

Q: 11) If employee contribution is relevant, define the limits for employee contributions and
state whether the employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary,
or number of units.

A:

Q: 12) If employee contribution is relevant, specify whether contributions can be made pre
and/or post tax.

A:


A:

Q: 14) If employer contribution is relevant, determine which of the following criteria are
necessary to calculate the employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-
defined criteria.

A:

Q: 15) If employer contribution is relevant, define the employer contribution as a fixed
amount or as percentage of the employee contribution.

A:

Q: 16) For each plan, define the vesting schedule (for example, 100% after 5 years of
service).

Explanation: A vesting schedule defines the seniority needed to 'own' the employer
contribution to a savings plan. contribution to a savings plan.

A:

Q: 17) For each plan, list the investment options available to participants (for example,
mutual funds, stock, and so on).

A:

20. Personnel Time Management
20.1. Work Schedules

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way is the Working Hours Decree implemented in your organization.

A:

Q: 2) Introduction

Explanation: For each group of employees, the time management requirements are based
on certain expectations. These expectations must be defined in the form of work schedules
for each of the groups of employees. This includes the description of possible deviations from
these expectations.

A:

Q: 3) Name your shifts. The following points will help you to define your shifts.

A:

Q: 4) Which patterns do your shifts use? For example, weekly, monthly, rotating.

A:

Q: 5) Describe the daily shifts. Specify start and end times, planned working hours and
breaks for each of these daily shifts. How do public holidays affect these daily shifts?

A:

Q: 6) Identify similar shifts (for example, early, day, night, flex) and patterns, (for example,
rotating, non-rotating).

A:

Q: 7) Do you have rules that change your daily shifts (for example, the last working day
before a holiday ends at noon)? Provide a list of such rules.

A:


Q: 8) Do you have part-time workers? How do you reflect that they are part-time? (A shift is
defined as part-time 8 hours on three days in the week, and they are assigned a percentage
of a full time shift, such as 50%).

A:

20.2. Personnel Time Specifications Administration

Questions:

Q: 1) How does your organization calculate/express absenteeism due to illness and
notification frequency?

A:

Q: 2) Please describe the process of sickness and recovery notification and indicate which
information is provided and how.

A:

Q: 3) Does your organization make use of notifications of sickness and recovery? If so, to
whom are they sent?

A:

Q: 4) You must identify rules and policies, as they determine the kind of time data you
collect. What kind of data is collected? For example, do you need to record attendances,
absences, the time of day, and elapsed times?

A:

Q: 5) Describe the different types of substitutions used in your company (such as a
substitution for a particular period of working time, or for a specific position or personnel
number).

A:

Q: 6) Describe the different types of availability/on-call duties used in your company (such
as on-call for maintenance, on-call for emergencies).

A:

Q: 7) Describe the different types of attendances and absences used in your company
(such as vacation, sick, business meeting).

A:

Q: 8) Into which categories can the identified attendances and absences be placed?

Explanation: "What are the categories into which the identified attendances and absences
can be placed? Examples of possible criteria used to categorize your attendances and

absences are - costing and financial information - payment relevance - internal and external
reporting, statistics. "

A:

Q: 9) Explain the reasons for the identified categories.

A:

Q: 10) For each attendance and absence, identify the amount and unit of time that can be
taken. Do you have attendances or absences of less than one day, one full day, or longer
than one day (up to a specified maximum)?

A:

Q: 11) There are various priorities for different attendances and absences. Therefore, you
must set the reaction for an overlap (for example if an employee gets sick on vacation). How
do you handle an overlap between attendances and absences?

A:

Q: 12) Which of the identified absences are unpaid?

A:

Q: 13) Which of the identified absences are paid? How are they paid?

A:

20.3. Personnel Time Accounts Administration

Questions:

Q: 1) Some attendances and absences affect time accounts, such as entitlements and
accruals. What accounts do you have, and how are they affected by specific attendances
and/or absences?

A:

Q: 2) What time accounts do you need? What time data is necessary for each account?
How often do you calculate the values for these accounts?

A:

Q: 3) What accounts do you need for statistical evaluation purposes (for example, all
absences, absences due to sickness, absences due to vacation, etc.)?

A:

Q: 4) What accounts do you need to evaluate vacations? (Note: entitlement accrual is
addressed in process group 3. Entitlement compensation is addressed in process group 9.)

A:

Q: 5) Time account data may be required for reporting purposes outside of HR. For
example, the total number of paid absence hours accrued in a particular period may be of
relevance to the Controlling department.

A:

Q: 6) Do you have any other accounts? How are they handled?

A:

20.4. Personnel Time Recording Subsystem

Questions:

Q: 1) Capture of time management data for a particular employee with particular
characteristics (interfaces to subsystems, direct entry, etc.).

A:

Q: 2) What kind of time events do you use (for example, clock-in, clock-out, start of break,
end of break, start of off-site work, end of off-site work, etc.)?

A:

Q: 3) Do certain time events apply to certain groups of employees, or are all time events
valid for all employees?

A:

Q: 4) Do your time recording processes include the identification of a reason for particular
time event? What are these reasons?

A:

Q: 5) Do these reasons have an effect on additional processing (generation of attendances,
absences)? Is there an approval process for the continued processing of an attendance or
absence?

A:

21. Training and Event Management
21.1. Cost Item

Questions:

Q: 1) Please define the cost elements that you require.

A:


21.2. Business Event Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Are business events held at more than one location?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) If there is more than one business event location, do you need to define a location
hierarchy?

A:

21.3. Business Event Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the business event hierarchy for the business event catalog of the customer.

A:

21.4. Business Event Type

Questions:

Q: 1) Which information should be stored for the business event type?

A:

Q: 2) How is the price of a business event determined?

A:

21.5. Resource Type

Questions:

Q: 1) Are rooms already available for the business events, or are external resources
accessed?

A:

Q: 2) Do the resources only consist of rooms, or do you want to use the system to manage
other resources too, such as beamers and overhead projectors?

A:

Q: 3) Have the rooms been equipped differently?

A:

Q: 4) Do rooms need to be locked because of maintenance work?


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Should the instructors be managed in the system?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Are the instructors employees at the enterprise, or are they also external persons?

A:

Q: 7) Should notification be sent to instructors?

A:

21.6. Attendee Types

Questions:

Q: 1) Which attendee types do you want to use?

A:
21.7. Organizer Types

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there more than one organizer at your enterprise?

A:

Q: 2) Which information must be stored for the organizer?

A:

I. Business Processes
1. Production Planning and Procurement Planning
1.1. Market-Oriented Planning
1.1.1. Sales and Operations Planning
1.1.1.1. Flexible Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to create your planning hierarchy manually or automatically?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Q: 2) How do you get the planning figures?

A:

Q: 4) How do you deal with overloads (for example, produce in other plants, reduce
quantity, enhance available capacity)?

A:

Q: 5) Define the level on which you want to carry out resource planning.

A:

Q: 6) Do you use a regular backup of your data to assure and check the quality of your
planning results?

A:

Q: 7) With which criteria do you want to take products out of the market?

A:

Q: 8) In which characteristic combinations do you have to plan?

A:

Q: 9) How will you check you planning results (early warning system, using planned line as
key figure)?

A:

Q: 10) Determine the whole planning b integrating the strategy of using different planning
versions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data should be copied
from one versioned infostructure (origin) to another.

Explanation: Determine the whole scheduling integrating the strategy of using different
planning versions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data should
be copied from one versioned infostructure (origin) to some other versioned infostructure.

A:

Q: 11) Specify the tools for copying data and integrate this into the whole scheduling,

A:

Q: 12) When planning in different information structures/ versions, how do you want to
make sure that planning results are shared with other planners for overall planning
consistency?

A:


Q: 13) What kind of (key) figures do you hand over from one to the next planning
procedure?

A:

Q: 14) If the information structure is not used for reporting, the names of the standard key
figures can be changed individually within the planning type. What are the new names?

A:

Q: 15) How do you want to maintain your planning hierarchy?

A:

Q: 16) Do you want to use routings or rough cut planning profiles for capacity planning?

A:

Q: 17) Make sure that the planning hierarchy is consistent in each tree.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 18) How do you want to calculate the proportions of the master data in the planning
hierarchy?

A:

Q: 19) How often do you have to rework the planning hierarchy for the master data, and for
calculating the proportions?

A:

Q: 20) If you create the planning hierarchy automatically, which planning objects do you
want to exclude from the hierarchy when generating the master data by using a method?

A:

Q: 21) What are your planning objects (for example, product group, material, region)?

A:

Q: 22) What is your source for planning data?

A:

Q: 23) On which levels (aggregated or disaggregated level) do you want to plan ?

A:

Q: 26) Determine the planning time fence (2): how many periods should be visible/planned
in past time?


A:

Q: 27) Determine the level and the object where you want to do resource planning, for
example, on product hierarchy level evaluation of production line capacity or transport
capacity on a product group level.

A:

Q: 29) Are there differences in the planning structure?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 30) Do you have different incomparable units in your planned materials?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 32) Do you use rough cut planning for resource planning?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 33) Which kind of formulas do you require for your planning processes and on which
level should the calculation be carried out?

A:

Q: 34) What kind of resources do you want to plan?

A:

Q: 35) What kind of resources do you plan?

A:

Q: 36) Which levels do you use in sales & operation planning?

A:

Q: 37) What information do you want to calculate but not save in the infostructure?

A:

Q: 38) What information on actual data you want to see in the planning phase?

A:

Q: 39) Which actual data do you want to display?

A:


Q: 40) Which key figures do you want to use?

A:

Q: 41) Which key figures should be visible, and which planned by each planner using the
corresponding planning type?

A:

Q: 42) Which key figures should be aggregated to a sum and/or average value, and which
key figures should not be aggregated at all?

A:

Q: 43) Which planning figures do you want to define for each of the planning procedures?
What are your objectives concerning optimization?

A:

Q: 44) Which special functions do you use as macros?

A:

Q: 45) What are your goals when planning capacity in flexible planning?

A:

Q: 46) What is your planning time bucket?

A:

Q: 47) What are the characteristics of your infostructure?

A:

Q: 48) How often do you want to maintain your planning hierarchy?

A:

Q: 49) How often do you want to plan and how often do you need to maintain this plan?

A:

Q: 51) How do you want to maintain your available capacity (for example, by shift plan,
manually, by factory calendar)?

A:

Q: 52) How do you want to generate your planning hierarchy?

A:

Q: 53) How do you want to organize the whole planning cycle in the time sequence?

A:

Q: 54) How do you want to launch new products (for example, when working with the
forecast tool, do you want to use the history of products that might behave similarly)?

A:

Q: 55) What are your planning procedures?

A:

Q: 56) What are the analyses based on the planning result compared to the analyses based
on actual data?

A:

Q: 58) How many items do you have in your planning hierarchy?

A:

Q: 59) Do you want to plan components derived from the plan of finished materials (e.g.
attachments, spare parts)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 60) At what point of time should the macro be executed?

A:

Q: 61) At which point(s) of time do you want to create capacity loads? Maintain this in the
time span periods in the rough cut planning profile.

A:

1.1.1.2. Standard SOP

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to carry out medium to long-term planning of sales and production
quantities for your finished products?

A:

Q: 2) At what level do you want to carry out sales and operations planning?

A:

Q: 3) At what intervals do you want to carry out sales and operations planning?

A:

Q: 4) Which sources are used in determining sales quantities?

A:

Q: 5) Is capacity availability checked at this planning level?

A:

1.1.1.3. Transfer of Results to Demand Management

Questions:

Q: 1) How often are the results of Sales and Operations Planning transferred to Demand
Management, and how is this defined?

A:

Q: 2) Which strategies are used in the transfer of SOP results to Demand Management?

Explanation: - Direct transfer of sales plan material - Transfer sales plan material as a
proportion of a product group - Direct transfer master production schedule - Transfer master
production schedule as a proportion of a product group

A:

1.1.2. Forecast
1.1.2.1. Materials Forecast

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you establish material forecasts (for example, weekly, monthly, yearly) for your
stock materials?

Explanation: Analyze whether it is feasible and necessary. Often is does not have to be
daily; weekly is sufficient.

A:

1.1.3. Demand Management
1.1.3.1. Demand Management

Questions:

Q: 1) Which planning strategies do you use to plan production quantities and dates?

A:

Q: 2) At which level do you want to maintain planned independent requirements?

A:

Q: 3) How do you create your planned independent requirements?

A:

Q: 4) Do you want to administer planned independent requirements in different versions?

A:


Q: 5) Do you also want to create customer requirements in demand management
transactions (in case, for example, the SD module is not used)?

A:

1.1.4. Long-Term Planning
1.1.4.1. MRP Planning File Entry (Long-Term Planning)

Questions:

Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant to
MRP.

A:

Q: 2) How far in advance do you need to consider changes to planning?

Explanation: Correspondingly, the planning horizon must be customized. In an ordinary case
only the net change planning (NETPL) is carried out, but total planning (NETCH) must also
be carried out periodically depending on the planning horizon. on the planning horizon.

A:

Q: 3) In what time intervals do you want to divide your planning horizon?

A:

Q: 4) How often will you require MRP performance tuning?

A:

1.1.4.2. Planning Scenario Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you specify scenario description, time frame, and plant for long term lot size
production?

A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out scenario comparisons with other scenarios including the active
version?

A:

Q: 3) What business process will you use to update the operative version?

A:

1.1.4.3. Long-Term Planning: Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) What requirements do you have for the evaluations?


Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the material
requirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.

A:

1.1.4.4. Transfer of External Procurement Data to Purchasing Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transmit the planning results for external procurement in the
Purchasing Information System, to make further evaluations for the vendor forecast?

A:

1.1.4.5. Transfer of Stock/Requirement Data to Inventory Controlling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to prepare and evaluate the stock/requirements data, determined in long-
term planning, using the standard analysis, within Inventory Controlling.

A:

1.1.4.6. Transfer Activity Type Requirement to Cost Accounting

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transfer the values determined for activity requirements in long-term
planning, as a planned payment to the Cost Center Accounting?

A:

1.1.5. Master Production Scheduling
1.1.5.1. MRP Planning File Entry

Questions:

MRP.

A:



A:


A:


A:

1.1.5.2. Master Production Scheduling - Total Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, be
planned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?

A:

Q: 2) Should enterprise areas/organizational units (storage location, for example) within a
plant be planned separately (MRP area)?

A:

Q: 3) In which time intervals are planning runs carried out?

A:

Q: 4) Should planning runs be carried out online or as background jobs?

Explanation: Which batch jobs have to be planned

A:

Q: 5) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, is
only the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well?

A:

Q: 6) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time?

A:

Q: 7) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)?

A:

Q: 8) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? How
should purchase requisitions be treated in this case?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals.

A:

Q: 9) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?

A:

Q: 10) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

A:

Q: 11) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders or
should an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacity
requirements.

A:

Q: 12) Which procedure are you using for lot-size calculation?

A:

Q: 13) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose of
common scheduling?

A:

Q: 14) Are MRP lists required?

A:

1.1.5.3. Master Production Scheduling - Single-Item

Questions:


A:

Q: 2) Should the planning run be single or multi-level?

A:

Q: 3) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time
(planning time fence)?

A:

Q: 4) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?

planning run does not create any new order proposals

A:

required?

A:



A:

Q: 7) How is the scheduling carried out?

A:

Q: 8) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

A:


A:

Q: 10) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?

A:

1.1.5.4. Master Production Scheduling - Interactive

Questions:


A:

Q: 2) Should Master Production Scheduling (MPS) be carried out interactively?

A:


A:

fence?


A:

required?

A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

1.1.5.5. Master Production Scheduling - Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for checking the results of requirements planning at your
company?

Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling and
correcting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP.

A:



A:

1.1.6. Material Requirements Planning

Questions:

MRP.

A:



A:


A:


A:


1.1.6.2. Overall Material Requirements Planning

Questions:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:



A:

required?

A:


A:

requirements.


A:


A:

common scheduling?

A:


A:

1.1.6.3. Material Requirements Planning - Individual

Questions:


A:


A:

fence?


A:

required?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

1.1.6.4. Material Requirements Planning - Interactive

Questions:

Q: 1) Should Material Requirements Planning (MRP) be carried out interactively?

A:


A:

fence?


A:

required?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

1.1.6.5. Material Requirements Planning - Evaluation

Questions:

company?



A:



A:

1.1.6.6. Planned Orders, Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there any specific reasons to change planned orders manually?

A:

1.1.6.7. Conversion of Planned Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Which procurement objects do you want to be created during the conversion?

A:

Q: 2) How do you want the planned orders to be converted?

A:

Q: 3) Which criteria do you want to be taken into account during conversion (for example,
MRP controller, release date, material, sales order)?

A:

1.1.7. Evaluations: Logistics Information System
1.1.7.1. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

Questions:


A:



A:


1.2. Sales Order Oriented Planning
1.2.1. Master Production Scheduling

Questions:

MRP.

A:



A:


A:


A:

1.2.1.2. Order BOM Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use the order browser to edit order BOMs at multi-levels?

A:

1.2.1.3. Master Production Scheduling - Total Planning

Questions:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:



A:

required?

A:


A:

requirements.

A:


A:

common scheduling?

A:


A:


1.2.1.4. Master Production Scheduling - Single-Item

Questions:


A:


A:


A:

fence?


A:

required?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

1.2.1.5. Master Production Scheduling - Sales Order-Specific

Questions:



A:


A:

fence?


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

1.2.1.6. Master Production Scheduling - Interactive

Questions:


A:

Q: 2) Should Master Production Scheduling (MPS) be carried out interactively?

A:



A:

fence?


A:

required?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

1.2.1.7. Master Production Scheduling - Evaluation

Questions:

company?


A:



A:


Questions:


MRP.

A:



A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:



A:

required?

A:


A:

requirements.

A:


A:

common scheduling?

A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

fence?



A:

required?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

1.2.2.4. Material Requirements Planning - Sales Order-Specific

Questions:


A:

fence?


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

1.2.2.5. Material Requirements Planning - Interactive

Questions:

Q: 1) Should Material Requirements Planning (MRP) be carried out interactively?

A:


A:

fence?


A:

required?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

1.2.2.6. Material requirements planning - evaluation


Questions:

company?


A:



A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:



A:

1.3. Consumption-Driven Planning
1.3.1. Forecast
1.3.1.1. Material Forecast

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you establish material forecasts (for example, weekly, monthly, yearly) for your
stock materials?

Explanation: Analyze whether it is feasible and necessary. Often is does not have to be
daily; weekly is sufficient.

A:


Questions:

MRP.

A:



A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:




A:


A:


A:


A:



A:

required?

A:


A:

requirements.

A:


A:

common scheduling?

A:



A:


Questions:


A:


A:

fence?


A:

required?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

1.3.2.4. Material Requirements Planning - Evaluation

Questions:

company?



A:



A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:



A:

1.4. Distribution Requirements Planning
1.4.1. Planning
1.4.1.1. Flexible Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to create your planning hierarchy manually or automatically?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) How do you get the planning figures?

A:

Q: 4) How do you deal with overloads (for example, produce in other plants, reduce
quantity, enhance available capacity)?

A:

Q: 5) Define the level on which you want to carry out resource planning.

A:

Q: 6) Do you use a regular backup of your data to assure and check the quality of your
planning results?

A:

Q: 7) With which criteria do you want to take products out of the market?

A:

Q: 8) In which characteristic combinations do you have to plan?

A:

Q: 9) How will you check you planning results (early warning system, using planned line as
key figure)?

A:

Q: 10) Determine the whole planning b integrating the strategy of using different planning
versions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data should be copied
from one versioned infostructure (origin) to another.

Explanation: Determine the whole scheduling integrating the strategy of using different
planning versions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data should
be copied from one versioned infostructure (origin) to some other versioned infostructure.

A:

Q: 11) Specify the tools for copying data and integrate this into the whole scheduling,

A:


Q: 12) When planning in different information structures/ versions, how do you want to
make sure that planning results are shared with other planners for overall planning
consistency?

A:

Q: 13) What kind of (key) figures do you hand over from one to the next planning
procedure?

A:

Q: 14) If the information structure is not used for reporting, the names of the standard key
figures can be changed individually within the planning type. What are the new names?

A:

Q: 15) How do you want to maintain your planning hierarchy?

A:

Q: 16) Do you want to use routings or rough cut planning profiles for capacity planning?

A:

Q: 17) Make sure that the planning hierarchy is consistent in each tree.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 18) How do you want to calculate the proportions of the master data in the planning
hierarchy?

A:

Q: 19) How often do you have to rework the planning hierarchy for the master data, and for
calculating the proportions?

A:

Q: 20) If you create the planning hierarchy automatically, which planning objects do you
want to exclude from the hierarchy when generating the master data by using a method?

A:

Q: 21) What are your planning objects (for example, product group, material, region)?

A:

Q: 22) What is your source for planning data?

A:


Q: 23) On which levels (aggregated or disaggregated level) do you want to plan ?

A:

Q: 26) Determine the planning time fence (2): how many periods should be visible/planned
in past time?

A:

Q: 27) Determine the level and the object where you want to do resource planning, for
example, on product hierarchy level evaluation of production line capacity or transport
capacity on a product group level.

A:

Q: 29) Are there differences in the planning structure?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 30) Do you have different incomparable units in your planned materials?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 32) Do you use rough cut planning for resource planning?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 33) Which kind of formulas do you require for your planning processes and on which
level should the calculation be carried out?

A:

Q: 34) What kind of resources do you want to plan?

A:

Q: 35) What kind of resources do you plan?

A:

Q: 36) Which levels do you use in sales & operation planning?

A:

Q: 37) What information do you want to calculate but not save in the infostructure?

A:

Q: 38) What information on actual data you want to see in the planning phase?


A:

Q: 39) Which actual data do you want to display?

A:

Q: 40) Which key figures do you want to use?

A:

Q: 41) Which key figures should be visible, and which planned by each planner using the
corresponding planning type?

A:

Q: 42) Which key figures should be aggregated to a sum and/or average value, and which
key figures should not be aggregated at all?

A:

Q: 43) Which planning figures do you want to define for each of the planning procedures?
What are your objectives concerning optimization?

A:

Q: 44) Which special functions do you use as macros?

A:

Q: 45) What are your goals when planning capacity in flexible planning?

A:

Q: 46) What is your planning time bucket?

A:

Q: 47) What are the characteristics of your infostructure?

A:

Q: 48) How often do you want to maintain your planning hierarchy?

A:

Q: 49) How often do you want to plan and how often do you need to maintain this plan?

A:

Q: 51) How do you want to maintain your available capacity (for example, by shift plan,
manually, by factory calendar)?

A:

Q: 52) How do you want to generate your planning hierarchy?

A:

Q: 53) How do you want to organize the whole planning cycle in the time sequence?

A:

Q: 54) How do you want to launch new products (for example, when working with the
forecast tool, do you want to use the history of products that might behave similarly)?

A:

Q: 55) What are your planning procedures?

A:

Q: 56) What are the analyses based on the planning result compared to the analyses based
on actual data?

A:

Q: 58) How many items do you have in your planning hierarchy?

A:

Q: 59) Do you want to plan components derived from the plan of finished materials (e.g.
attachments, spare parts)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 60) At what point of time should the macro be executed?

A:

Q: 61) At which point(s) of time do you want to create capacity loads? Maintain this in the
time span periods in the rough cut planning profile.

A:

1.4.1.2. Transfer of Results to Demand Management

Questions:

Q: 1) How often are the results of Sales and Operations Planning transferred to Demand
Management, and how is this defined?

A:

Q: 2) Which strategies are used in the transfer of SOP results to Demand Management?


Explanation: - Direct transfer of sales plan material - Transfer sales plan material as a
proportion of a product group - Direct transfer master production schedule - Transfer master
production schedule as a proportion of a product group

A:

1.4.1.3. Demand Management

Questions:

Q: 1) Which planning strategies do you use to plan production quantities and dates?

A:

Q: 2) At which level do you want to maintain planned independent requirements?

A:

Q: 3) How do you create your planned independent requirements?

A:

Q: 4) Do you want to administer planned independent requirements in different versions?

A:

Q: 5) Do you also want to create customer requirements in demand management
transactions (in case, for example, the SD module is not used)?

A:

1.4.2. DRP - Distribution Resource Planning Run
1.4.2.1. DRP Run for Materials

Questions:

Q: 1) What settings do you use in it?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to display results directly from the planning run?

Explanation: Settings for MRP list active and display

A:

Q: 3) Which items will you plan using single-item planning?

A:

Q: 4) Do you use single/multi level planning?

A:

Q: 5) Do you carry out MRP for individual materials?

A:

1.4.2.2. DRP Run for Plant

Questions:

Q: 1) What settings do you use?

A:

Q: 2) What sources of demand will you use by plant?

A:

Q: 3) If you carry out planning by visual inspection, how is it supported and how do you
want the data to be transferred to SAP Retail?

A:

Q: 4) What determines the delivery circle? (vendor sub-range/site/other)

A:

Q: 5) Does the goods delivery take place on specific days?

Explanation: Create delivery cycle and assign it to material/article master.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you want planned inward and outward movements (purchase orders, deliveries,
etc.) to be taken into consideration?

Explanation: Customizing the MRP type: external requirements Customizing the MRP type:
external requirements

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you maintain articles, which need to be reordered automatically, at the
merchandise category level ?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

2. Procurement

Questions:



A:

Q: 2) How does material move between plants?

A:

2.1. Procurement of Materials and External Services
2.1.1. Purchase Requisition
2.1.1.1. Purchase Requisition Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How are purchase requisitions created in the case of stock material, material for direct
consumption, external services?

A:

Q: 2) Will you use a purchase requisition to trigger creation of for a contract or scheduling
agreement (Outline Agreement Request)?

A:

Q: 3) How many days does it take, typically, before a purchase requisition becomes
demand in a purchasing document given to a supplier? Please indicate processing time per
plant.

Explanation: This would be used by the system to calculate replenishment lead times.
Example : In plant A, within two days the purchasing department will convert a requisition for
widgets into a purchase order issued to a supoplier.Please indicate processing times per
plant.

A:

Q: 4) Will purchase requisitions generated via material/article requirements planning be
manually post-processed?

Explanation: Problematic if dynamic rounding profiles are used, because these only take
effect at the time of conversion into POs. You post-process the result, which is changed
again after the manual post-processing (via rounding profiles). (via rounding profiles).

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

2.1.1.2. Purchase Requisition Assignment

Questions:

Q: 1) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions assigned to a source of
supply?

A:

Q: 2) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions grouped together?

A:

Q: 3) What support (e.g. price simulation) does the buyer need in order to assign the
purchase requisition?

A:

Q: 4) Are purchase requisitions converted into requests for quotations?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Which sources of supply will you use for purchase requisitions? Are these sources of
supply internal and/or external to your company?

A:

2.1.1.3. Release Purchase Requisition

Questions:

Q: 1) Should requisitions be subject to approval by someone (or possibly several people)
before the requisition can be processed into an RFQ and/or purchase order?
a

Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasing
department manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the department
manager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under what
circumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -
for external services

A:

Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?

A:

Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?

A:
2.1.2. Purchasing
2.1.2.1. Purchase Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How will purchase orders be created in your system?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want the system to check whether the purchase price is within a predefined
tolerance in your system, compared with the material valuation price?

A:

Q: 3) Describe how the source of supply is determined for manually created purchase
requisitions!

A:

Q: 4) Specify the consumption categories for which you will procure external services and
material directly: Asset, cost center, production order, project, sales order, other (please
specify).

A:

Q: 5) Which types of purchase order will you use?

A:

Q: 6) How do you transmit purchase orders to your vendors?

A:

Q: 7) Do you order material in a unit of measure that differs from the one used for
stockkeeping purposes?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you pay for material in a different unit of measure than the one that is shown in the
PO/and or used for stock putaway?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 9) Is it necessary to track certificates of origin and/or customs reference numbers for
materials produced in foreign countries?

A:

Q: 10) Will you be purchasing material imported from foreign vendors ?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 11) Are purchasing info records to be updated automatically with every purchase order?

Explanation: If updating is desired and you use rounding profiles in the case of stock
transport orders, after the first purchase order created the logistic data on the article is no
longer read for the rounding profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are
read! profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are read!

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you wish to analyze/evaluate purchase transactions according to the reasons for
ordering?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you plan and enter freight costs in the PO? If yes, describe the basis of the costs.
Also indicate if any types of costs can be determined automatically (for example, freight costs
per piece, per unit of weight, as a percentage of the value).

A:

Q: 14) Do you want to prevent users from changing the account assignment of items in
purchasing documents for which they have no authorizations? If so, for which purchasing
documents?

A:

Q: 15) Do you sometimes order stock material directly for a cost center or another
consumption category?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 16) Do you have to declare your ordering activities to the authorities? If so, describe.

A:

Q: 17) Do you allow overdeliveries? If so, specify the percentage variance for the individual
materials/material types.

A:

Q: 18) On the occasion that a vendor sent you less than the quantity ordered, would you
ever want this shortfall to be considered an under delivery, with no further deliveries
expected? Please list the values for each material/material group.

Explanation: In case of exceeding this value, it will be a partial delivery. In case the value
stayed below, it will be an under delivery

A:

Q: 19) Can the materials you purchase be subject to different tax types? (For example,
based upon the material purchased, based upon the plant for which the material is
purchased, etc)? o

A:

Q: 20) Do your POs issued to vendors contain specific transport or packing instructions? Is
vendors' compliance with the transport and packing instructions to be recorded when the
goods are received ?

Explanation: e.g., full compliance, ignored instructions, ...

A:


Q: 21) Is it to be possible for purchase orders to be generated automatically following a
goods receipt? Specify the criteria for this.

Explanation: Define the movement types for which this should be allowed.

A:

2.1.2.2. Contract Release Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Will contract release orders be created in R/3 manually, with reference to purchase
requisitions, and/or automatically? (For more details, refer to the Source Administration
Scenario.) - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

A:

2.1.2.3. Release of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) Are purchase documents to be approved by someone before being issued to
vendors? Describe the approval procedure....

Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by the
purchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved by
the President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approval
process applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

A:

Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3
regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.

Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for release
procedure

A:

Q: 3) Will you use an electronic signature to release purchasing documents?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

2.1.2.4. Transmission of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) How do your vendors transmit shipping notifications?

A:

Q: 2) What information does the shipping notification contain?

A:


Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?

A:

Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notification
have been received?

A:

Q: 5) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination

A:

Q: 6) How will you transmit your purchasing documents to your vendors?

Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.

A:

Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)
on your order form?

A:

Q: 8) How are purchase orders to be transmitted?

A:
2.1.2.5. Scheduling Agreement Delivery Schedule

Questions:

Q: 1) Are scheduling agreement delivery schedules/SA releases created in R/3 manually,
with reference to requisitions and/or automatically? (Further details in sourcing administration
scenario.)

A:

Q: 2) How do you wish to synchronize (monitor) the delivery schedules/SA releases with
respect to the quantities delivered?

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreement
releases via the Internet?

Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace is
installed in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In the
release creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internet
release.

A:

2.1.2.6. Transmission of Scheduling Agreements

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you wish to transmit scheduling agreements?

A:



A:

2.1.2.7. Delivery and Acknowledgment Expediter

Questions:

Q: 1) How many days after the due delivery date will you send messages to your vendors
urging delivery of the overdue goods?

A:

Q: 2) Should this deadline monitoring vary for different materials or articles? If so, please
explain.

A:

Q: 3) Will you send out reminders regarding outstanding vendor confirmations if the due
date is exceeded? Acknowledgment deadline is exceeded?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 4) Which kinds of purchasing document do you want to send to vendors? 1) The
complete purchasing document 2) Information re changes 3) Reminders (prior to due date 4)
Urging letters/expediters (after due date) 5) Scheduling agreement delivery schedules.

Explanation: What kinds of purchasing document output (for example printouts, fax
messages, EDI) will you send to your vendors? 1) Complete purchasing document 2) Change
notice (When a purchasing document which has already been outputted and sent to a vendor
is changed, you can only output the changes instead of the entire document) 3) Reminders
(send before the due date) 4) Urging letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) 4) Urging
letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) If you use order confirmations and/or shipping
notifications: 5) Urging Letter for Outstanding Acknowledgement or Shipping notification
notification If you use scheduling agreements: 6) Rolling Delivery Schedule 7) Urging Letter
Related to Rolling Delivery schedules

A:

Q: 5) Will you send urging messages (expediters) to your vendors in the case of overdue
deliveries. If so, how many days after the due date will you do this?

A:

Q: 6) How are reminders and urging letters (expediters) to be sent to your vendors?

A:
2.1.2.8. Inbound EDI Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoc
type is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.

Explanation: Example: Customer 1 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - VDA4913
Customer 2 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - ANSIX12 856

A:

Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?

Explanation: Examples: Customer forecast delivery schedules, vendor shipping notifications

A:

Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.

Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way you
use them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to add
more fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments re
function modules in R/3.

A:

Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?

A:

Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3
and your subsystem?

Explanation: Example: tRFC or field port

A:

Q: 6) Has SAP certified your EDI subsystem?

Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, look
under http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -
R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714

A:


Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and the
desired send time.

Explanation: Example: time fixed as soon as document is created

A:

Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)
and the desired processing time

Explanation: Examples: immediately upon receipt, periodically...

A:

Q: 9) Do you want to use Work Flow to be notified of errors or warnings?

A:

Q: 10) What type of reporting tools do you want to use?

Explanation: Example: Idoc lists, active monitoring

A:

2.1.2.9. Processing of Shipping Notifications/Confirmations

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you process shipping notifications with the R/3 System?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Once you have issued a purchasing document to a vendor, do you want to track
"confirmations" your vendor may return to you regarding the order?

Explanation: Examples: 1) Order acknowledgements which confirm the order dates and
quantities. 2) Shipping notifications, informing you that the vendor has shipped the goods
(you can have goods receipts with reference to shipping notifications). 3) Any other - please
describe.

A:

Q: 3) What do you do if the order acknowledgment contains quantity and/or delivery date
variances vis vis the purchase order or a previous acknowledgment?

A:

Q: 4) Which type of vendor confirmation do you need and at which time intervals? Which
events should trigger a confirmation?

A:

2.1.2.10. Transmission of Shipping Notifications

Questions:

Q: 1) Which department or person is to be informed of the shipping notifications?

A:

2.1.3. Transportation
2.1.3.1. Message Transmission for Transport Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? If
so, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

A:


A:
2.1.3.2. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

A:


Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?

A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

A:

Q: 12) If so, which ones?

A:

Q: 13) Is freight charged to the customers or is it absorbed by the company?

A:

Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point in
time (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?

A:

Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?

A:

Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?

A:

Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?

A:


Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?

A:

Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?

A:

Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?

A:

Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of your
external carrier?

A:

Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.

A:


A:

2.1.3.3. Freight Cost Invoicing and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

A:

2.1.4. Goods Receipt
2.1.4.1. Reservation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific material reservations (for sales, for production) for your
stock materials?

A:

Q: 2) How far in advance are materials to be allowed to be reserved?

A:

Q: 3) In which cases would you want to use manual reservations?

A:

Q: 4) How long after the reservation date are open reservations canceled?

A:

2.1.4.2. Goods Receipt Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) The material stock balances shown in your legacy system are to be transferred to the
R/3 System. Will the stocks be valuated at the prices specified in the R/3 e total value of the
former system be taken over?

A:

Q: 2) If you do not use the R/3 Purchasing functionality, describe the process of receiving
goods from a vendor.

A:

Q: 3) If you do not use production orders of the R/3 System, describe the process of
receiving goods from production.

A:

Q: 4) Should the person who posts a goods receipt be able to use a different account
assignment than the one specified via the automatic account determination process?

A:

2.1.4.3. Goods Receipt Processing with Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.

Explanation: General introduction to the subject General introduction to the subject

A:

Q: 2) Name the storage locations to which vendors deliver the goods.

A:

Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?

A:

Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order
considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?

A:

Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"
at a different location than those posted to normal stock?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!

A:

Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you order
in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

A:

Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be
used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?

A:

Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping
instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 10) Which documents are generated with the goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note on
design of SAPScript documents, message determination

A:

Q: 11) Which documents are generated in connection with a goods receipt?


A:


Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person who
enters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?

A:

Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enter
the goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the
inspection has been carried out?

Explanation: QM module

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time
of goods receipt?

Explanation: Batch management Batch management

A:

Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.

A:

Q: 16) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? If
not, who is responsible within Logistics?

A:

Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?
Which information should be included in the printout?

A:

2.1.4.4. Automatic Generation of Purchase Orders

Questions:



A:

2.1.5. Service Entry Sheet

Questions:

service provider?

A:

2.1.6. Warehouse/Stores

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have storage locations, which are not relevant for Warehouse Management ?

A:

Q: 2) Will you use storage locations for more than one plant? Name these storage locations
and the relevant plants.

A:

Q: 3) Describe the structure of your warehouse!

A:

Q: 4) Are you using external Warehouse control systems / subsystems? Do you plan to
connect this system with the R/3 ?

A:

Q: 5) Which system should determine the storage bins for stock placement / removement ?

A:

Q: 6) For removals and batch management, which system should determine the batch?

A:

Q: 7) Which system should generate the transport orders ?

A:

Q: 8) How does your automated storage and retrieval system communicate to the legacy
system? Explain or provide a design drawing.

A:

Q: 9) Do you need traceability of materials based on pallet information?

A:

Q: 10) Do you want to control whether goods in the goods receipt zone are displayed in the
availability check?

A:

2.1.6.1. Stock Placement Processing


Questions:

Q: 1) Are pallets managed in the system with a unique number?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they in
unrestricted-use stock?

A:

Q: 3) Can goods be issued directly from the goods receipt area?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you post your materials to "blocked stock"?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you post your materials to return delivery stock?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage
(putaway).

A:

Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?

Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 8) Is a transfer requirement to be generated automatically at the time of a goods receipt
with reference?

A:

Q: 9) For which goods movements are transfer orders to be created automatically?

A:

Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer order
form, sticker, etc.)?

A:


Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in the
goods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post to
stock - move to inspection area?

Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or
remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area
- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?

A:

Q: 12) Which parameters determine your putaway strategies?

Explanation: Storage type search

A:

Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is
created?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 14) Are transfer orders confirmed manually or automatically?

A:

Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.

A:

Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to place
the materials? Is this done manually?

A:

Q: 17) Who is notified of a stock putaway? How is this person notified?

A:

Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins) for your stock materials?

A:

Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?

A:

Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?


A:

Q: 21) Do you receive consignment stock from vendors?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?

A:

Q: 23) Do you create a pre-allocation of your materials within warehouse management?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shipping
point, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?

A:

Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?

A:

2.1.6.2. Difference Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

A:

2.1.6.3. Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.

A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

A:

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?


A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?

A:

2.1.6.4. Return Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stock
purge?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Will you create action plans/tasks for this defective material?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) on
the defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you have to inspect/re-inspect defective material found in your stockroom or on the
production floor?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?

A:

Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined that
they are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.

A:

2.1.6.5. Posting Change WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use transfer orders to implement transfer postings with respect to
consignment material?

A:

Q: 2) Which movement types will you use for posting changes?

A:

Q: 3) What type of documentation (forms) is to be generated in the case of transfer
postings?

A:

Q: 4) Who is to be informed of a transfer posting? How is this person to be informed?

A:

2.1.6.6. WM Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use storage-bin-to-storage-bin stock transfers?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

2.1.7. Invoice Verification
2.1.7.1. Evaluated Receipt Settlement (ERS)

Questions:

Q: 1) According to which rules do you effect automatic settlement with regard to goods
receipts?

A:

Q: 2) Should a goods receipt with reference to a PO automatically generate an invoice for
the delivery?

A:

2.1.7.2. Invoicing Plan Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) How many invoicing plans will you have?

A:


Questions:



A:



A:



A:


A:

and your subsystem?


A:



A:

desired send time.


A:



A:


A:




A:

2.1.7.4. Invoice Processing with Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you reduce the amount of your vendors' invoices automatically in the event of
variances?

A:

Q: 2) Name the types of tax that might appear on a vendor's invoice.

A:

Q: 3) List the types of tax that are generally applicable and should therefore be
automatically suggested in the standard system when an invoice is entered.

A:

Q: 4) If there are different types of tax, can groups of these tax types occur together under
certain circumstances?

A:

Q: 5) If you are implementing QM, do you always require that goods receipts have passed
QM inspection before being paid ?

A:

Q: 6) How do you treat unplanned delivery costs included in an invoice ?

Explanation: Notes: Delivery costs are additional costs such as for express delivery.

A:

Q: 7) Do you sometimes have to change the account assignment for a certain purchase
order at the time of invoice verification?

A:

Q: 8) Should down payments also be cleared?

A:

Q: 9) Which other messages do you want to send to your vendors or to people within your
organization with respect to the invoice receipt?


Explanation: For example, a payment advice note

A:

Q: 10) Is a goods receipt always necessary for invoice verification purposes? If so, do you
allow reversal of the goods issue after the invoice has been posted? has been entered?

A:

Q: 11) Is the automatic account determination process only defined by Financial
Accounting? If not, who is responsible within Logistics?

A:

Q: 12) Do you wish to notify Purchasing if the invoice price varies from the purchase order
price?

Explanation: "Mail to Purchasing" possible after posting invoice.

A:

Q: 13) Specific to Brazil: Describe the Nota Fiscal process including special situations such
as future delivery, importation, returnable transport packing, and freight.

A:

Q: 14) Do you use tax jurisdiction codes? Specify the codes used.

Explanation: Only relevant to USA and Brazil.

A:

Q: 15) Do you receive invoices with a large volume of data for which no checking is
necessary?

Explanation: Check whether it is possible to switch to ERS.

A:

Q: 16) Do you receive invoices relating to transactions that are not administered in the
system?

A:

2.1.7.5. Invoice Overview

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for processing incorrect invoices in your firm?

A:

Q: 2) Describe the information flow between Purchasing, Logistics and Invoice Verification
in the case of errors.

Explanation: Organizational and system-supported communication (e.g. by mail from within
the application). There is no standard SAP solution for system-supported communication.
Instead, a customer-specific solution has to be prepared (e.g. workflow, message technique).

A:

2.1.7.6. Invoice Release

Questions:

Q: 1) Which invoice blocking reasons will you use?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice when
the number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value for
X.

A:

Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due to
variances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.

Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantity
difference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) you
tolerate without warning or error messages?

A:

Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What is
the threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) without
reference to a purchase order?

A:

Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price and
the invoice price? How is this person to be notified?

A:

Q: 6) Do you wish to block invoices randomly (stochastically) or only if a certain value is
exceeded?

A:

Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?
le manager)

Explanation: E.g. buyer, accounts payable accountant.

A:

2.2. Procurement via Subcontracting

Questions:


A:


A:

plant.

plant.

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:

supply?

A:


A:



A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


Questions:

a


A:


A:


A:
2.2.2. Purchasing

Questions:


A:


A:

requisitions!

A:

specify).

A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

ordering?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:

documents?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:



A:

purchased, etc)? o

A:



A:




A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:



A:


procedure

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:


A:


A:

have been received?

A:



A:



A:

on your order form?

A:


A:

Questions:

scenario.)

A:


A:


release.

A:



Questions:


A:



A:


Questions:


A:

explain.

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A:

Questions:



A:



A:



A:


A:

and your subsystem?


A:



A:

desired send time.



A:



A:


A:



A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


describe.

A:


A:


A:



Questions:


A:

2.2.3. Transportation

Questions:


A:



A:


A:

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

external carrier?

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

2.2.4. Provision of Components

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you record materials ordered for specific work orders?


A:

Q: 2) How will the consumption of these parts be entered and who will post the return in the
system?

A:

Q: 3) How do you record which materials were received specifically for a work order?

A:

system?


A:



A:



A:

Q: 7) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what information
do they contain?


A:


A:

2.2.4.2. Delivery Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.


Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.

A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?

A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.

A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?

A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

A:


Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in the
delivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements are
then copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determined
automatically.

A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?

A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.

A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?

A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with
certain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).
You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between
delivery and invoice.

A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?

A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

A:

Q: 22) How do you allocate merchandise which is in short supply (delivery priorities)?

A:


Questions:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

of goods receipt?


A:


A:


A:


A:

2.2.5.2. Subsequent Adjustment of Components

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you make adjustments for over-/underconsumption of components by the
subcontractor (vendor)?

A:


Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have vendors with several/different ordering addresses, payees, carriers, and
so on? If so, what do these depend on (assortment, supply region)?

A:

Q: 2) Do you have warehouses with stock of different plants?

A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

2.2.6.1. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?

A:

Q: 2) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

A:

Q: 3) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

A:

Q: 4) Will you maintain picking strategies?

A:



Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

(putaway).

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

with reference?

A:


A:


A:




A:



A:

created?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:

bin.

A:


A:



A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

postings?

A:


A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:

purge?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

production floor?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:

receipts?

A:

the delivery?

A:


Questions:



A:



A:




A:


A:

and your subsystem?


A:



A:

desired send time.


A:



A:


A:



A:



Questions:

variances?

A:

Q: 2) How do you notify your vendors of the reduction?

A:

Q: 3) Do you carry out invoice verification in the background?

A:

Q: 4) Do you have vendors who create one invoice for a delivery period?

A:

Q: 5) Do you receive mixed invoices (credit and debit items in the same document)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:



A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

price?


A:


A:



A:

necessary?


A:

system?

A:


Questions:


A:



A:


Questions:


A:

X.

A:



A:


A:



A:

exceeded?

A:

le manager)


A:

2.3. Procurement on a Consignment Basis

Questions:


A:


A:

plant.

plant.

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:

supply?

A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


Questions:

a


A:


A:


A:
2.3.2. Purchasing

Questions:



A:


A:

requisitions!

A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

ordering?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:

documents?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:



A:

purchased, etc)? o

A:



A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:



A:


procedure

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:


A:


A:

have been received?

A:



A:



A:

on your order form?

A:


A:

Questions:

scenario.)

A:


A:


release.

A:


Questions:


A:




A:


Questions:


A:

explain.

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A:

Questions:



A:



A:



A:


A:

and your subsystem?


A:



A:

desired send time.


A:



A:


A:



A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


describe.

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No




A:



A:


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

of goods receipt?


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

(putaway).

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

with reference?

A:


A:


A:



A:



A:


created?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:

bin.

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:



A:

postings?

A:


A:


Questions:

purge?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

production floor?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:

Q: 1) Do you create transfer requirements or transfer orders for consignment material?

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:

X.

A:



A:


A:


A:

exceeded?

A:

le manager)


A:


2.4. Internal Procurement

Questions:


A:


A:

plant.

plant.

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Will you manually create purchase requisitions?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:

supply?

A:


A:



A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


Questions:

a


A:


A:


A:
2.4.2. Purchasing

Questions:


A:


A:

requisitions!


A:

specify).

A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

ordering?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:

documents?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:



A:

purchased, etc)? o

A:



A:



A:


Questions:



A:


procedure

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:


A:


A:

have been received?

A:




A:



A:

on your order form?

A:


A:

Questions:

scenario.)

A:


A:


release.

A:


Questions:


A:




A:


Questions:


A:

explain.

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A:

Questions:




A:



A:



A:


A:

and your subsystem?


A:



A:

desired send time.


A:




A:


A:



A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


describe.

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:



Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

of goods receipt?


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

(putaway).

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

with reference?

A:


A:



A:



A:



A:

created?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

postings?

A:


A:

2.4.4.3. Difference Processing During Stock Placement

Questions:


A:

2.4.4.4. Confirmation of Stock Placement

Questions:


A:


Questions:

purge?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

production floor?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:


receipts?

A:

the delivery?

A:


Questions:

variances?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:



A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

price?


A:


A:



A:

necessary?


A:

system?

A:


Questions:


A:



A:


Questions:


A:

X.

A:



A:



A:


A:

exceeded?

A:

le manager)


A:


Questions:



A:



A:



A:


A:

and your subsystem?


A:



A:

desired send time.


A:



A:


A:



A:

2.5. Pipeline Processing
2.5.1. Pipeline Withdrawal

Questions:

do they contain?


A:


Questions:


A:

X.

A:



A:


A:


A:

exceeded?

A:

le manager)


A:


2.6. Source Administration
2.6.1. RFQ/Quotation
2.6.1.1. Processing of Requests for Quotations

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you generally request several vendors to submit prices, terms and conditions in
the form of a tender/bid/quotation?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you want to assign a collective number to the different quotations submitted by
several vendors?

Explanation: Use of collective number. Use of collective number.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Can an article be procured from several vendors? If so, is this the rule or an
exception? (Or specify percentage.)

A:

Q: 4) Do you carry out requirements planning for structured articles (e.g. prepack, display)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) How do you determine the requirement quantities at header level in the case of
structured articles?

A:

Q: 6) Do you exclude articles from requirements planning? If so, which (e.g. import,
seasonal, promotion, etc.)?

A:

2.6.1.2. Release of RFQs

Questions:



A:



procedure

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 4) In automatic load-building, are (promotion) purchase orders to be consolidated in
addition to requisitions?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

2.6.1.3. Transmission of RFQs

Questions:



A:

Q: 2) Will you send rejection letters to unsuccessful bidders? Indicate how such letters are
to be transmitted to the vendor.

A:
2.6.1.4. Vendor Quotation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to have the system automatically analyze/evaluate quotations submitted
by vendors?

A:

Q: 2) How do you receive the quotations?

A:

Q: 3) Are the quotations submitted by vendors to be automatically compared by the
system?

Explanation: Use of price comparison list! Use of price comparison list!

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

2.6.1.5. Transmission of Rejections

Questions:



A:

Q: 2) Will you send rejection letters to unsuccessful bidders? Indicate how such letters are
to be transmitted to the vendor.

A:
2.6.2. Outline Purchase Agreements
2.6.2.1. Contract Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use contracts in R/3? If so, what will you use contracts for (e.g. stock
materials, consumable materials, external services)?

A:

Q: 2) Which types of contract do you need (e.g. value contracts, quantity contracts)?

A:

Q: 3) Are the contracts to be valid for: - more than one plant - more than one company
code?

A:

Q: 4) Do you also allow a consumption account in the case of contracts for stock materials?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

2.6.2.2. Scheduling Agreement Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use scheduling agreements to procure materials from external suppliers or
supplying plants? If so, which types of scheduling agreement will you use? Should these
scheduling agreements be maintained centrally?

Explanation: Will you maintain scheduling agreements in SAP with either an external vendor
or a plant supplying the materials? If yes, - what type of scheduling agreements are you
maintaining? (for example, standard, subcontracting, consignment, stock transfer. - will any of
these scheduling agreements reference a centrally maintained contract?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to reconcile the quantity requested and the quantity actually delivered
with your vendor (monitoring function)? If so, how are the lines of the scheduling agreement
delivery schedule generated: manually or via materials planning (MRP)? M


A:

Q: 3) Do you need release documents (e.g., call-offs) and master conditions to manage
your scheduling lines? If yes, are any of these JIT delivery schedules?

A:


release.

A:

Q: 5) Do you sometimes assign a consumption category to scheduling agreements for stock
materials?

A:

2.6.2.3. Release of Outline Agreements

Questions:



A:


procedure

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

2.6.2.4. Transmission of Contracts

Questions:



A:



A:

on your order form?

A:

Q: 4) How will you transmit your contract release orders?

Explanation: Background: Setting up of message determination. E.g. notification by fax, EDI,
... fax, EDI, ...

A:

Q: 5) How do you wish to transmit your contracts to your vendors?

Explanation: Background: Setting up the message determination process.

A:

Questions:


A:



A:

2.7. Return Deliveries
2.7.1. Quality Notification
2.7.1.1. Creation of a Quality Notification

Questions:

Q: 1) In your company, who is responsible for the receipt or creation of quality notifications?

Explanation: Call center organizational unit etc.?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want a simplified view of the structure and functions of a notification to
facilitate ease of use for occasional users?

Explanation: Create simplified notification type for transaction IQS21.

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to create notifications using copy models?

Explanation: Customizing: Define initial screens for notifications.

A:

Q: 4) How do you prioritize incoming notifications (complaints, queries and so on)?

Explanation: For example: "Very high", "high" etc.

A:

Q: 5) Do you define specific periods of time for processing notifications?

Explanation: Processing period for specific notification priorities.

A:

Q: 6) List the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information you
require when creating the notification. Add other business partners, if necessary.

Explanation: Partner definition.

A:

Q: 7) How do you describe the problem? Do you use a verbal description or standard
codes?

Explanation: Coding: Definiton of catalog profile

A:

Q: 8) Do you want to attach electronic documents (for example, inspection reports) to the
notification?

Explanation: Linking of quality notifications to the Document Management System.

A:

Q: 9) Do you assign a responsible person to each task?

Explanation: Note: An incorrect assignment is usually the result of a problem with the
documentation.

A:

Q: 10) Do you have ad-hoc tasks that you always carry out for different notification types or
priorities? If so, describe these tasks.

Explanation: Definiton of response profiles.

A:

Q: 11) Do you want the person or coordinator responsible for a task to be notified
automatically by the system?

Explanation: User-based workflow definition or definition using HR reporting structure.

A:

Q: 12) Do you want newly created notifications to be subject to an additional approval
procedure?

Explanation: Set the "approval required" indicator for the required notification type (IMG
activity: OLQN_CL). An additional notification status "Submit for approval" will be created. be
created.

A:

Q: 13) How do you want to structure the layout of your notification with regard to the
problem description, execution, items, tasks, activities?

Explanation: Note: This applies to all notification types (Q1,Q2,Q3 etc.).

A:

Q: 14) Do you record costs arising from complaints? Describe how you record these.

Explanation: Costs, for example, for wages, material, telephone costs, travel expenses etc.

A:

Q: 15) Do you want to create and activate the QM order, based on the notification? Where
are these costs to be settled?

A:


Q: 16) How many notifications do you receive each day or each year?

Explanation: Defining number ranges for notifications.

A:

Q: 17) Do you record the performed activities that solved the customer problem in a
standardized way (for example, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possible
solutions for a problem?

Explanation: Coding of tasks, items and activities.

A:

Q: 18) How is a quality notification processed in your company? Describe the process for
external or internal notifications.

Explanation: Designing action box with sequential processing.

A:

Q: 19) Do you allow your customers to create complaints in your system using the Internet?

A:

2.7.2. Outbound Shipments

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

external carrier?

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:



A:


A:
2.7.3. Warehouse

Questions:


A:


A:



A:


A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:



A:

bin.

A:


A:


A:


A:

2.7.4. Shipping
2.7.4.1. Message Transmission for Deliveries

Questions:



A:


A:


A:
2.7.4.2. Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use the SAP Warehouse Management component?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Which type of warehouse management do you use?


Explanation: Customizing: LE shipping picking lean WM control for assignment of
plant/storage location/warehouse number plant/storage location/warehouse number

A:

Q: 3) Do you use Lean WM for picking?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 4) Is the picking process handled via an external system?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Which activities do you carry out during the picking process?

Explanation: Description of process steps

A:

Q: 6) Do you carry out picking on an article or recipient basis?

Explanation: Two-step picking

A:

Q: 7) Do you have material that:

A:

Q: 8) Do you confirm your picking process?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 10) How will the relevant picker be assigned to a pick order?

A:

Q: 11) Will target times for picking be recorded?

A:

Q: 12) How are picking staff assigned to individual pick orders?

A:


Q: 13) Do you use software from another vendor to handle this process? If so, how is the
process carried out?

Explanation: Linkage of external systems

A:

Q: 14) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse
control unit, etc.)?

A:

Q: 15) How do you determine the location at which an item must be picked?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by the
plant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your picking
location?

A:

Q: 16) Do you group together deliveries for which picking is to take place over a certain time
interval?

Explanation: Wave pick

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 17) How do you plan the picking sequence of the individual deliveries?

Explanation: User exit for delivery sorting within a wave pick User exit for delivery sorting
within a wave pick

A:

Q: 18) Which documents are used for picking and what information do they contain
(planned time, transport equipment to be used, etc.)?

A:

Q: 19) How do you optimize picking (split according to specific criteria)?

Explanation: Determination of TO split by volume, time, weight Determination of TO split by
volume, time, weight Determination of TO split by volume, time, weight

A:



Explanation: Steps in process

A:

Q: 21) In how many steps are the goods grouped?

A:

Q: 22) Are target times for picking determined?

Explanation: Control of ACTUAL-PLAN data at time of picking Customizing: LE warehouse
management events shipments determination plan data plan data

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 23) Is payment of pickers performance-related?

A:

2.7.4.3. Packing Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your packing process in detail.

A:

Q: 2) Would you require a packing proposal in sales documents?

A:

Q: 3) Do you have specific packing materials?

Explanation: Maintaining packaging materials as articles

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you need to be able to pack certain articles in certain packaging materials only?

Explanation: Control of assignment of articles and shipping material

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in other
units?


Explanation: Control of functionality using relevant assignment of article group shipping
material in article master.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you require detailed information on the type and number of the packing materials
to be used for picking? If so, which algorithms do you use to determine this information?

Explanation: Can the rough workload estimate be used, in order to create the relevant
information?

A:

Q: 7) Do you want to pack items of a delivery in such a way that you know which and how
many articles are in each shipping material (for example, wire basket or roll container)?

Explanation: Control whether integrated packaging can be used in the area of delivery
processing.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you require packing documents (packing list) and what information do these
contain?

A:

Q: 9) Are you currently using any external software for packing?

A:

Q: 10) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,
several packages into one container?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 11) What packing materials do you use?

A:

Q: 12) Do you need to check the maximum capacity limit of packing materials?

Explanation: Maintaining capacity limit for articles.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transaction
on the packing station for the R/3 System?

A:


A:


Questions:

system?


A:



A:



A:

do they contain?


A:


A:

3. Production
3.1. Discrete Production

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require tools based on individual lots and orders for processing your
production plans?


A:

3.1.1. Production Order Creation

Questions:


A:


A:


A:

3.1.1.2. Creating/Processing Production Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require different order types in order to, for example, control the automatic
selection of routings in various ways, predefine costing data in various ways or specify
strategies for batch determination?

A:

Q: 2) On creating a production order various different master data can be transferred.
Which criteria do you take into consideration in the selection (for example, validity, lot size
range)?

A:

Q: 3) Is it necessary to manually change or complete certain data from the order?

A:

Q: 4) To determine the production dates and capacity requirements of the operations within
an order, you must schedule the order. Which types of scheduling do you want to use?

A:

Q: 5) Do you require capacity availability check during order creation?

A:

Q: 6) Do you require material availability check during order creation? Should this check be
carried out for individual or for all components of an order?

A:

Q: 7) Do you have operations that are processed externally, that is to say not carried out in
your own company but given to a vendor who does the work in his own workshops (e.g. with
subcontracting processes or capacity bottlenecks)?

A:

Q: 8) Do you require collective orders in order to carry out functions simultaneously for a set
of orders (for example, release, schedule, quantity chage, backflush, calculations)?

A:

Q: 9) Do you create and release in one step?

A:

Q: 10) Do you ever need to split an existing production order on which work has already
started into two separate production orders?

A:

Q: 11) Do you want to integrate documents from the Document Management System
(DMS) into the production order?

A:

Q: 12) Do you want to use simulation orders, for example, to see what effect changes to
original data (sales order, master data) have on a production order?

A:

3.1.1.3. Release of Production Order

Questions:

Q: 1) With which procedure do you want to release production orders?

A:

Q: 2) Do you release complete orders or single operations?

A:

Q: 3) Do you require material availability check during order release?

A:


A:

Q: 5) It is possible to trigger certain functions automatically after the order release (for
example, creation of transport requirements, creation of inspection lots, printout of orders,
creation of serial numbers). Do you want to make use of this?

A:

3.1.1.4. Printout of Production Order


Questions:

Q: 1) Do you print production documents (e.g. operation control ticket, job ticket, pull list,
confirmation slip, time ticket)?

A:

Q: 2) What kind of documents do you need?

A:
3.1.2. Material Staging
3.1.2.1. Processing the Pull List

Questions:

Q: 1) Are your production storage locations separate from the central warehouses?

A:

Q: 2) Is material consumed constantly (KANBAN replenishment) or is consumption irregular
(pull list)?

A:

Q: 3) Which replenishment strategies will you use in the pull list?

A:

Q: 4) Will you want to print the pull list?

A:

3.1.2.2. Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use picking lists with which you can determine and execute all withdrawals still
to be executed for a production order?

A:

3.1.2.3. One-Step Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) In the case of stock transfers, do you wish the material to be immediately available at
the receiving plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

3.1.2.4. Two-Step Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transport goods receipts to more than one physical storage facility?

A:


3.1.2.5. Request WM Material Staging

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to issue stock material for production/process orders from just one or
from several storage locations?

A:

Q: 2) Will the material provision occur from warehouse management (control cycle
records)?

A:


Questions:

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?

A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

A:


A:


A:




A:

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?

A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

A:


A:

3.1.2.7. Confirmation of Removal f. Storage

Questions:


A:

3.1.3. Capacity Requirements Planning

Questions:


A:

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:
3.1.4. Production Order Execution
3.1.4.1. Goods Issue Processing for Production Orders

Questions:


Q: 1) Do you want to enter the withdrawal of material components for your order manually
or post it automatically on the order confirmation (backflush)?

A:

Q: 2) It is possible to withdraw to an order those materials which are not listed as
components in the order. Are such unplanned withdrawals possible?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Can planned goods issue quantities differ from the actual quantities? What then
happens with the material reservation?

A:

Q: 4) Are there any components in your company that require batch handling? Is batch
determination used?

A:

Q: 5) Which mechanism is used to activate a goods issue (for example, a pull list)?

A:

Q: 6) When is the withdrawal posted to an order?

A:

3.1.4.2. Production Order Execution

Questions:

Q: 1) What are the organizational aspects when executing production (responsibilities,
scope of work, starting and finishing points)?

A:

Q: 2) Are there any restrictions in the order execution process?

A:

Q: 3) When and how are operations/orders confirmed?

A:

Q: 4) When are goods issues and goods receipts processed?

A:

3.1.4.3. Backorder Processing

Questions:


Q: 1) Do you process backorders (orders which can't be shipped when they're requested)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) How do you resolve missing parts situations?

A:

Q: 3) Do backorders receive priority over normal deliveries (sales)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

3.1.4.4. Production Order Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) There are various ways of entering backflushes in an order. Which do you want to
use?

A:

Q: 2) Which data must be confirmed (quantities, dates, personnel data, scrap, etc)?

A:

Q: 3) Should material withdrawals for a production order be automatically posted during
confirmation (backflushing)?

A:

Q: 4) Should goods issue be posted automatically to the storage location while backflushing
an operation?

A:

Q: 5) Do you use plant data collection (PDC)?

A:

Q: 6) Should the backflush be entered using a barcode scanner?

A:

3.1.4.5. Processing of Goods Receipts from Production

Questions:

Q: 1) What requirements do you have with regard to the quantity of goods received?

A:

Q: 2) Do you tolerate variances vis vis the planned quantity of a goods receipt?

A:


Q: 3) Is the "delivery completed" indicator to be set automatically?

A:

Q: 4) Do you want to initially post inward movements into the warehouse/stores to "stock in
quality inspection"?

A:

Q: 5) Which mechanism do you use to trigger a goods receipt?

A:

Q: 6) When do you post the goods receipt in the case of an order?

A:

Q: 7) Are batches to be created at the time of a goods receipt?

A:

Q: 8) Are serial numbers to be created in the case of a goods receipt?

A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


(putaway).

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

with reference?

A:


A:


A:



A:



A:

created?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

3.1.4.7. Confirmation of Stock Placement

Questions:


A:

3.1.5. Evaluation and Mass Processing
3.1.5.1. Mass Processing: Production Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to use mass processing to execute certain production order functions?

A:


Questions:


A:



A:

3.2. Repetitive Manufacturing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require period and quantity-based tools for processing your production plans?

A:

Q: 2) Do you produce the same product or a similar product over a longer period?

A:

Q: 3) Do your products always flow through the machines and work centers in the same
sequence?

A:

Q: 4) Do you use Repetitive Manufacturing as a make-to-stock tool, that is, with no direct
reference to the sales order?

A:


Q: 5) Do you use Repetitive Manufacturing as an order-oriented production tool based on
sales orders (valuated or unvaluated stock)?

A:

Q: 6) Do you use repetitive manufacturing as production lot oriented production?

A:

Q: 7) Will you require reporting points?

A:

Q: 8) Will you want to post activities?

A:

Q: 9) Which form of scheduling will you require?

A:
3.2.1. Processing of Master Production Schedule
3.2.1.1. Production Planning in the Planning Table

Questions:

Q: 1) Which type of scheduling do you want to use?

A:

Q: 2) Which combination of the planning tools will you use?

A:

Q: 3) How will you create run schedule quantities?

A:

Q: 4) How will you assign the production version to the production line?

A:

Q: 5) Are your products produced on several production lines? In the planning table, will
you want to monitor the capacity load over several production lines?

A:

3.2.1.2. Sequencing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which process will you use for Sequencing?

A:
3.2.2.1. Processing the Pull List

Questions:

Q: 1) Are your production storage locations separate from the central warehouses?

A:

Q: 2) Is material consumed constantly (KANBAN replenishment) or is consumption irregular
(pull list)?

A:

Q: 3) Which replenishment strategies will you use in the pull list?

A:

Q: 4) Will you want to print the pull list?

A:


Questions:

storage bins)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

3.2.3. Production Execution and Actual Data Creation
3.2.3.1. Production Execution (with Run Schedule Quantities)

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the organizational aspects of production, explain responsibilities, work
scope, start and end points.

A:

Q: 2) What are you going to do with the backlog?

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to print the run schedule quantities?

A:

3.2.3.2. REM Backflush


Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to confirm at the end of the production process (assembly confirmation)
?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you want to separate the backflush process, that is, split the backflush into
performance critical and performance uncritical processes (separated backflush)?

A:

3.2.3.3. Reprocessing Backflushed Items

Questions:

Q: 1) How will you handle the reprocessing of backflushed items (negative stocks or
reprocessing records)?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to create individual reprocessing records or cumulated reprocessing
records?

A:


Questions:


A:



A:

3.3. Process Manufacturing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require a receipt- or a batch-managed production process?

A:

Q: 2) Do you have products that must meet high quality requirements and comply with legal
requirements (FDA, GMP) (Regulated Production)?

A:


Q: 3) Are your products manufactured in a discontinuous process?

A:

Q: 4) Are your products manufactured in a continuous process over a certain period of
time?

A:

Q: 5) Do you need a process for filling or packaging your bulk material?

A:

3.3.1. Process Order
3.3.1.1. Production Campaign Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require production campaigns in order to carry out more efficient setup and
clean-out processes and to settle fixed costs to the orders more precisely?

A:

3.3.1.2. Planned Order Processing

Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:

3.3.1.4. Process Order Creation and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How many process orders will you have per period (day, week, month)?

A:

Q: 2) How long will be the typical lead times for process orders?


A:

Q: 3) Which criteria will be taken into account during the selection of master data
(production version)?

A:

Q: 4) Which recipes are used (approved recipes or non-approved recipes)?

A:

Q: 5) Do you have multiple outputs during one manufacturing process ? Are the materials
that are produced in addition (co-products or by-products) cost-relevant?

A:

Q: 6) Do you require different order types?
p

Explanation: Different order types are required to, for example: - Control the automatic
selection of the master recipe in different ways - Preassign data for costing in different ways -
Specify different strategies for batch determination - Make sure that only approved recipes
are used in production - Control the process data documentation

A:

Q: 7) Will a material availability check be required as part of order creation?

A:


A:

Q: 9) Which scheduling type will be used?

A:

Q: 10) Will individual operations of an order be processed externally?

A:

Q: 11) Will the batch number for the material to be produced be assigned during order
creation (automatically or manually)? Do you want the batch to be classified during automatic
assignment?

A:

Q: 12) Will you require a manually triggered batch determination for the components?

A:


Q: 13) Do you want the creation and release of the order to take place in one step?

A:

Q: 14) Which order data will you manually change or add?

A:

Q: 15) Is it necessary to change approved recipes during order processing? Describe the
approval procedure.

A:

Q: 16) Will you need special user statuses dependent on the order type?

A:

Q: 17) Will you require material calculation?

A:

Q: 18) Will you need a resource selection?

A:

Q: 19) Do you want the release of an order to only be possible after successful resource
selection?

A:

3.3.1.5. Release of Process Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you release process orders individually or collectively?

A:

Q: 2) Will you release the complete order or a single operation?

A:


A:

Q: 4) Will you require capacity availability checking for order release?

A:


Q: 5) Do you want the batch number to be assigned for the material to be produced during
order release (automatically)? Do you want the batch to be classified during automatic
assignment?

A:

Q: 6) Will you need an automatic batch determination for the components?

A:

Q: 7) Which functions should be automatically triggered after order release (e.g. creation of
transport requirements, creation of inspection lots, printout of orders)?

A:

Q: 8) Should control recipes be created with the order release?

A:

3.3.1.6. Process Order Print

Questions:

Q: 1) Which shop floor papers do you need?

A:
3.3.2. Capacity Requirements Planning

Questions:


A:

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:
3.3.2.3. Process Flow Scheduler (PFS) - Capacity Planning and Optimization

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use the process Flow Scheduler (PFS)?

A:



Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:

3.3.3.3. Request WM Material Staging

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to issue stock material for production/process orders from just one or
from several storage locations?

A:

Q: 2) Will the material provision occur from warehouse management (control cycle
records)?

A:


Questions:

storage bins)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:

3.3.4. Process Order Execution
3.3.4.1. Goods Issue for Process Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want the goods issue to be processed using the PI sheet or with the goods
issue transaction?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want goods issue to take place manually or automatically (backflush)?


A:

Q: 3) Are there any unplanned goods issues?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 4) Can the planned goods issue quantities be different from the actual quantities? What
will then happen to the material reservation?

A:

Q: 5) Will you use components that are batch managed? Will batch determination be used?

A:

Q: 6) Are there any components for which batch determination can take place
automatically?

A:

Q: 7) Are there any components for which batch determination must be carried out
manually?

A:

Q: 8) Which mechanism will be used to trigger a goods issue (for example, pull list)?

A:

Q: 9) When will the goods issue be posted to an order?

A:

Q: 10) Which process will be used to determine the current consumption dates?

A:

3.3.4.2. Process Order Execution

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

3.3.4.4. Process Order Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want the confirmation to be carried out using the PI sheet or the backflush
transaction?

A:

Q: 2) Which data do you have to confirm (quantities, dates, scrap, etc.)?

A:

Q: 3) How do you want the backflush to be entered?

A:

Q: 4) Will you need a milestone confirmation?

A:

Q: 5) Do you want a withdrawal for components to be posted during the confirmation
(backflush)?

A:

Q: 6) Will you use a plant data collection (PDC)?

A:


Q: 7) Do you want the confirmation be entered using a bar code scanner?

A:

3.3.4.5. GR Processing from Production

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:
3.3.5. Process Management
3.3.5.1. Control Recipe Creation

Questions:

Q: 1) Should control recipes be created with the order release?

A:

Q: 2) Where will the control recipes be sent?

A:

Q: 3) What will the security requirements be for signatures?

A:
3.3.5.2. Control Recipe Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) How will your control recipes be sent?

A:
3.3.5.3. PI Sheet Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which data do you want to display in the PI sheet (for example, control information,
notes with additional information, references to documents, component information)?

A:

Q: 2) Which data do you want to be entered in the PI sheet?

A:

Q: 3) Do you want calculations to be carried out in the PI sheet?

A:

Q: 4) Will you calculate the yield of your production process?

A:

Q: 5) How shall deviations from the planned values be treated (tolerances, follow-on
actions, etc.)?

A:

Q: 6) should batch determination be carried out in the PI sheet?

A:

3.3.5.4. Processing Process Manufacturing Cockpit

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you also want to use order-independent cockpits beside PI sheets?

Explanation: You can use cockpits to make available information and function calls that you
need over and over again at a central position.

A:

3.3.5.5. Process Order Processing with Process Control System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which functions are fulfilled by your distributed control system ?

A:

Q: 2) Do you have a certified interface between the distributed control system and the SAP
System?

A:


Q: 3) Which data will be transferred between the SAP System and distributed control
system?

A:

Q: 4) Which information will the process control system collect and perhaps filter?

A:

Q: 5) Which data will the distributed control system return?

A:

Q: 6) Do you want this data to go into the process data documentation?

A:

3.3.5.6. Create Process Message

Questions:

Q: 1) Will process messages ever have to be created manually (for example, during
malfunctions, etc.)?

A:

3.3.5.7. Process Message Processing and Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you want deviations or unplanned events to be reported? Where shall this
information be sent (for example, message to mail user)?

A:

Q: 2) How will the sending of the process message be triggered?

A:

Q: 3) Which possible destination types are there?

A:
3.3.6. Process Data Documentation / Process Order Completion
3.3.6.1. Material Reconciliation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to analyze and verify the quantity of ingredients used at the end of the
production process by comparing the material quantity that really entered the production
process with the planned material quantity?

A:

3.3.6.2. Batch Record Archiving

Questions:


Q: 1) Will customer-specific documents be attached to the batch record?

A:

3.3.6.3. Process Order Archiving / Deletion

Questions:


A:

3.3.7. Evaluation and Mass Processing
3.3.7.1. Mass Processing: Process Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to execute specific process order functions in mass processing?

A:

Questions:


A:



A:

3.4. Production Supply with KANBAN

Questions:

Q: 1) Which type of KANBAN do you use?

A:

Q: 2) Do you have fixed control cycles, in which both the number of containers as well as
the container quantity are set and one procurement element is created for each emptied
container (classic KANBAN)?

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to use KANBAN integrated with material requirements planning? Are the
materials to be planned in the planning run and corresponding procurement proposals
created, which provide a preview for the next consumption? Replenishment is, however,

Explanation: Do you want to use KANBAN integrated with material requirements planning?
Are the materials to be planned in the planning run and corresponding procurement
proposals created, which provide a preview for the next consumption? Replenishment is,
however, only triggered by the kanban signal. (Classic KANBAN with MRP)

A:

Q: 4) Do you want the quantities withdrawn to be entered directly into the system (manually
or plant data collection) and do you want the system to automatically set the kanban to
EMPTY when the kanban quantity is reached (KANBAN with quantity signal)?

A:

Q: 5) Do you want kanbans to be generated only on concrete material requirements and
then deleted again after replenishment (event-driven KANBAN)?

A:

Q: 6) Do you want to reproduce a "One-card KANBAN", with two containers in a control
cycle?

A:

Q: 7) Would you like to use KANBAN cross-plant (possible for the replenishment strategy
stock transfer with stock transfer reservation and in-house production with production
orders)?

A:


A:

Q: 9) Do you want to deliver a kanban directly to your customer via an SD scheduling
agreement?

A:

3.4.1. Trigger Replenishment Through Kanban Signal
3.4.1.1. Trigger Replenishment Through Kanban Signal

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way would you like to change the kanban status?

A:

Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, IN
PROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?

A:

Q: 3) In which way would you like to print the kanban card?

A:

3.4.2. Replenishment In-House Production with Production Order
3.4.2.1. Production Order Release

Questions:

Q: 1) With which procedure do you want to release production orders?

A:

Q: 2) Do you release complete orders or single operations?

A:


A:


A:

Q: 5) It is possible to trigger certain functions automatically after the order release (for
example, creation of transport requirements, creation of inspection lots, printout of orders,
creation of serial numbers). Do you want to make use of this?

A:

3.4.2.2. Printout of Production Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you print production documents (e.g. operation control ticket, job ticket, pull list,
confirmation slip, time ticket)?

A:

Q: 2) What kind of documents do you need?

A:
3.4.2.3. Production Order Execution

Questions:


A:


A:


A:



A:

3.4.2.4. Production Order Confirmation (no Link to Goods Receipt)

Questions:

use?

A:


A:


A:

an operation?

A:


A:


A:

3.4.2.5. Goods Receipt Processing (Kanban Set to FULL Automatically)

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:

3.4.2.6. Production Order Confirmation (Link to Goods Receipt)

Questions:

use?

A:


A:


A:

an operation?

A:


A:


A:

3.4.3. Replenishment In-House Production with Run Schedule Quantities
3.4.3.1. Production planning in the planning table

Questions:

Q: 1) Which type of scheduling do you want to use?

A:


Q: 2) Which combination of the planning tools will you use?

A:

Q: 3) How will you create run schedule quantities?

A:

Q: 4) How will you assign the production version to the production line?

A:

Q: 5) Are your products produced on several production lines? In the planning table, will
you want to monitor the capacity load over several production lines?

A:

3.4.3.2. Production Execution (With Run Schedule Quantities)

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the organizational aspects of production, explain responsibilities, work
scope, start and end points.

A:

Q: 2) What are you going to do with the backlog?

A:

Q: 3) Do you want to print the run schedule quantities?

A:

3.4.3.3. Backflush Kanban (Automatice GR, GI, Kanban Set to FULL)

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you deal with scrap?

A:

Q: 2) How do you deal with returning excess components?

A:

3.4.3.4. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Automatic GR, GI and Backflush)

Questions:


A:


A:



A:
3.4.4. Replenishment In-House Production with Manual KANBAN
3.4.4.1. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Automatic GR and GI)

Questions:


A:


A:


A:
3.4.4.2. Backflush Kanban (Automatic GR and GI, Status Change Kanban)

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you deal with scrap?

A:

Q: 2) How do you deal with returning excess components?

A:

3.4.4.3. Goods Receipt Processing (Separate)

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

3.4.5. Replenishment External Procurement with Standard Purchase
Order/Source List

Questions:


A:


A:


A:

have been received?

A:



A:



A:

on your order form?

A:

Q: 8) Are purchase orders automatically created from GRs be transmitted to the vendor?

Explanation: In the standard system no message records are generated for purchase orders
that are generated automatically from a goods receipt! However, this may be desired,
especially for returns.

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:
3.4.5.2. Goods Receipt Processing (Central Delivery)

Questions:



A:


A:

Q: 3) To which stock do you post materials at the time of their receipt?

A:

Q: 4) Will you post goods you receive to stock in quality inspection?
the goods wherever they should go as a result of the usage decision?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Which goods receipt inspections (which may be triggered by the system) and which
inspection results (e.g. expiration date) are entered in the system?

A:

Q: 6) Against which reference documents do you effect a goods receipt?

A:


A:

Q: 8) Which information do you use as a basis for planning your goods receipts (volume,
weight, expected time requirements, etc.)?

A:



A:

Q: 10) For which material types do you wish to record data at the time of goods receipt?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

Q: 13) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you
order in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:

Q: 18) If you use Warehouse Management, describe the stock put-away process (how the
goods are placed into storage).


Explanation: Above all, interesting if R/3 WM is used.

A:


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 21) How is the recipient to be notified of a goods receipt for material intended for direct
consumption/usage?

A:

of goods receipt?


A:


A:


A:


A:

3.4.5.3. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Delivery to Supply Area)

Questions:


A:



A:


A:
3.4.6. Replenishment External Procurement with Stock Transfer Orders
(Plnt to Plnt

Questions:


A:

order?

A:


A:

system?

A:


A:

Q: 6) How do you record materials supplied by subcontractors?

A:

system?


A:



A:



A:



A:

3.4.6.2. Goods Receipt Processing (Receiving Plant)

Questions:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

of goods receipt?


A:


A:


A:


A:

3.4.6.3. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Automatic GR)

Questions:


A:


A:


A:
3.4.7. Replenishment External Procurement with Scheduling Agreement
3.4.7.1. Transmit Scheduling Agreement Schedule Lines

Questions:


A:



A:

3.4.7.2. Goods Receipt Processing (Central Delivery)

Questions:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:



A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

of goods receipt?


A:


A:


A:


A:

3.4.7.3. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Delivery to Supply Area)

Questions:


A:


A:


A:
3.4.8. Replenishment External Procurement with Summarized JIT Call
3.4.8.1. Status Change Kanban to FULL


Questions:


A:


A:


A:
3.4.9. Replenishment Stock Transfer with Reservation
3.4.9.1. Transfer Posting w. Reference to Reservation (Aut. Status Change
Kanban)

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Will you carry out transfer postings without deliveries between sites in which postings
are immediately made to stock at the receiving site?

Explanation: Use of 301 Use of 301

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

3.4.9.2. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Automatic Transfer Posting)

Questions:


A:


A:


A:
3.4.10. Replenisment Stock Transfer with Direct Transfer Posting
3.4.10.1. Status Change Kanban to FULL

Questions:



A:


A:


A:

4. Sales and Distribution

Questions:

Q: 1) Which departments/employees are responsible for the different sales processes in
your company? Describe in detail the exception handling for these processes.

A:

4.1. Pre-Sales Handling
4.1.1. Sales Support (CAS)
4.1.1.1. Promotion Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you currently run mailing campaigns?

A:

Q: 2) Do you use address lists for direct mailing? According to which criteria the address list
should be reworked (for example, sales volume, equipment number, credit limi t)?

A:

Q: 3) Do you send mailing campaigns with samples, advertising goods?

A:

Q: 4) Do you use internet mailing for complaints processing?

A:

4.1.1.2. Sales Activity Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you perform the following sales activities:

A:

Q: 2) Do you use address lists for direct mailing campaigns?

A:


Q: 3) Do you track customer complaints in service management?

A:

Q: 4) Do you record information on competitors or competitor products?

A:

Q: 5) Do you track information on prospective customers?

A:

4.1.2. Customer Inquiry
4.1.2.1. Customer Inquiry Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your inquiry process in detail.

A:

Q: 2) Are alternative items required for inquiry processing and how do you handle them?

A:

Q: 3) Do you allow inquiries for products still under development (text item)?

A:

Q: 4) What texts are required in an inquiry?

A:

4.2. Sales Order Processing (Standard)
4.2.1. Customer Outline Agreement
4.2.1.1. Quantity Contract Processing

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract?
If so, then for what reasons?

A:


A:


A:

contract?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you offer special prices or discounts for contracts (price agreements or contract
prices)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 13) What are the requirements for completing a contract (for example, full value, quantity
contracts)?

A:



A:


A:

4.2.1.2. Value Contract Processing

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:

contract?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

prices)?

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

contracts)?

A:


A:


A:


A:

4.2.1.3. Processing Group Master Contracts

Questions:


A:

4.2.1.4. Customer Scheduling Agreement Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to schedule requested deliveries per item on various dates?


A:

Q: 2) How do you schedule the requested deliveries?

Explanation: Describe which time components you use, and what these depend on.
Examples: loading time, packing time, transit time, transit lead time Time components can
depend on the material, shipping point, and route.

A:

Q: 3) Do you check available stock (availability check) for scheduling agreements?

A:

Q: 4) Is the delivery schedule in your scheduling agreement for serial or replacements
parts?

A:

Q: 5) Do you use scheduling agreements with cumulative accounting? If so, describe in
detail.

A:

Q: 6) Which partners are involved in the process?

Explanation: Note: Possible partners in the standard R/3 system include the sold-to party,
goods recipient, payer, billed-to party, freight forwarders, and external service providers.
Decide which partners you want to use.

A:

Q: 7) Are you using any EDI messages?

A:

4.2.2. Sales Order
4.2.2.1. Customer Quotation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your quotation process in detail.

A:

Q: 2) What texts are required on a quotation?

A:

Q: 3) Which information (for example, prices) is passed to subsequent documents?

A:


Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, delivery
time, commitment dates, validity periods)?

A:

Q: 5) Do you pass requirements to MRP for quotations?

A:

Q: 6) Do you want to assign order probabilities to quotations?

A:

4.2.2.2. Sales Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?

A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,

A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?

A:

Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been used
already?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

A:


Q: 8) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

A:

Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

A:


Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.

A:

date?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you pass your sales plan on to demand management?

A:

Q: 13) How do you schedule deliveries?

A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?

you want to print.

A:

Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

A:

Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?

A:


Q: 17) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

A:

Q: 18) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planning
materials?

A:

Q: 19) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase these
materials, or only for certain orders?

A:

Q: 20) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?

A:

Q: 21) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?

A:

Q: 22) Do shipping notifications create expediting documents?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 23) Do you send replacement, additional or alternative materials free-of-charge?

A:

Q: 24) Do you offer a set of products (Sales BOM)? Please describe the pricing and
availability processing in detail.

A:

Q: 25) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

A:

Q: 26) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 27) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?

A:


Q: 28) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

A:

Q: 29) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for
the free good item)?

A:

Q: 30) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?

A:

Q: 31) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

A:

Q: 32) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?

A:

Q: 33) Do you handle customer-specific inventory?

A:

Q: 34) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planning
processes.

A:

Q: 35) Do you want to personalize your sales order entry screens?

A:

4.2.3. Risk/Credit Management
4.2.3.1. Credit Control

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have a current policy on risk management/credit control? Describe in detail.

A:

Q: 2) What kinds of risk management do you use?

A:

Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure in
detail.

A:


Q: 4) What department is responsible for monitoring and controlling credit?

A:

Q: 5) At which organizational level is the responsibility for credit limit assignment?

A:

Q: 6) If you use other organizational levels, describe them in detail.

A:

Q: 7) Is credit control carried out in distributed systems?

A:

Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail to
credit representative)?

A:

Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management
(e.g. sales order, delivery)?

A:

Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximum
document value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded
(warning, block, error message)?

A:

Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?

A:

Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.

A:

Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.

A:

Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,
using batch jobs)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.2.4. Backorder Processing

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.2.5. Shipping

Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:



A:



A:

date?

A:


A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:



A:



A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:



A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:

4.2.5.2. Proof of Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there business transactions for which the invoice is only generated when the
customer has confirmed the arrival of the delivery?

A:

Q: 2) Do you often have deliveries for which the delivery quantity varies or is not known
exactly at the time of delivery?

A:

4.2.5.3. Picking

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse control
unit, etc.)?

A:


location?

A:


Questions:


A:


A:

units?


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:

Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?

Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to be
picked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.
Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).

A:

4.2.5.6. Goods Issue Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances would you cancel goods issue?

A:

4.2.5.7. Creation of a Quality Certificate

Questions:

Q: 1) Which types of certificate will you create for your customers?

Explanation: For example, certificate of analysis, inspection certificate

A:

Q: 2) Describe the typical layout that you use for quality certificates.

A:

Q: 3) Name the essential data for the certificate.

A:

Q: 4) Do you create user-specific quality certificates (layout)? If yes, are there differences in
the layout and data contents? Give example copies.

A:

Q: 5) Which texts and information should the certificates contain?

Explanation: For example, references to country norms or other comments

A:

4.2.6. Warehouse Management

Questions:

storage bins)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:



A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


Questions:

Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods
receipt?

A:

Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received
(or signature on corrected delivery note)?

A:


A:

4.2.7. Shipment

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:

4.2.7.2. Shipment Cost Calculation and Settlement

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

4.2.8. Billing
4.2.8.1. Processing Billing Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?


A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.

A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?


Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.

A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).


A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?

A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?

A:

Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?


A:

Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

A:

Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?

addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.

A:

Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.

A:

Q: 19) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.

A:

Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?

A:

Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?

A:

Q: 22) Describe your payments processes in detail.

A:

Q: 23) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

A:
4.2.8.2. Pro forma Invoice Processing

Questions:



A:

4.2.8.3. Invoice List Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Would your customers require a list of all billing documents that were created for a
specified period (e.g. all documents from 1-15 of the month)?

A:

Q: 2) Are there any special discounts that would be applied to this invoice list?

A:

4.2.8.4. Billing Document Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?

A:

Q: 2) Do any activities follow cancellation, for example, credit releases?

A:

4.2.9. Output
4.2.9.1. Output Transfer

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

Q: 10) What correspondence do you wish to send?

A:

Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:



A:

4.3. Sales Order Processing: Make/Assembly To Order
4.3.1. Customer Outline Agreement
4.3.1.1. Quantity Contract Processing

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No


A:


A:


A:

contract?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

prices)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


contracts)?

A:


A:


A:

4.3.1.2. Value Contract Processing

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:

contract?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


prices)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

contracts)?

A:


A:


A:


A:

4.3.1.3. Processing Group Master Contracts

Questions:


A:

4.3.1.4. Customer Scheduling Agreement Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to schedule requested deliveries per item on various dates?

A:

Q: 2) How do you schedule the requested deliveries?

Explanation: Describe which time components you use, and what these depend on.
Examples: loading time, packing time, transit time, transit lead time Time components can
depend on the material, shipping point, and route.

A:

Q: 3) Do you check available stock (availability check) for scheduling agreements?

A:

Q: 4) Is the delivery schedule in your scheduling agreement for serial or replacements
parts?

A:

Q: 5) Do you use scheduling agreements with cumulative accounting? If so, describe in
detail.

A:

Q: 6) Which partners are involved in the process?

Explanation: Note: Possible partners in the standard R/3 system include the sold-to party,
goods recipient, payer, billed-to party, freight forwarders, and external service providers.
Decide which partners you want to use.

A:

Q: 7) Are you using any EDI messages?

A:

4.3.2. Sales order

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:

documents?

A:

already?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:

date?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

output?

you want to print.

A:


A:


what are they?

A:


A:

materials?

A:

Q: 19) Do you use a make-to-order production process?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 20) Do you use an assemble-to-order production process?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 21) Do you use complex products that are manufactured in a large number of variants
(for example, cars) that should be defined as one variant product (variant configuration)? If
yes, please describe in detail (e.g. classification, pricing).

Explanation: Do you use complex products that are manufactured in a large number of
variants (for example, cars) that should be defined as one variant product (variant
configuration)? If yes, please describe in detail (e.g. classification, pricing, configuration
profile, inventory check of existing configurable material).

A:

Q: 22) Do your sales orders directly generate planned/production orders?

A:

Q: 23) Do you check availability for the components of the production orders?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

you need to show?

A:


A:

processes.

A:

Q: 40) Do you allow for partial reduction of the down payment?

A:

4.3.2.3. Order BOM Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use the order browser to edit order BOMs at multi-levels?

A:


Questions:


A:


A:

detail.

A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

using batch jobs)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.3.4. Costing
4.3.4.1. Costing for Sales Document

Questions:

Q: 1) Are you planning to execute a complex make-to-order production, and do you want to
calculate with the construction?

Explanation: If so, you can calculate parts of the production structure using the order BOM
cost estimate with the design, without having to know the entire production structure.

A:



Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.3.6. Shipping

Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:



A:




A:

date?

A:


A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:



A:



A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:



A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:



A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

4.3.6.3. Picking

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

unit, etc.)?

A:


location?

A:


Questions:


A:


A:

units?


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:



A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:



A:


A:


A:



A:



A:

4.3.7. Warehouse management
4.3.7.1. Stock removal processing

Questions:

storage bins)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:




A:


A:


A:


A:

4.3.7.2. Difference processing

Questions:

receipt?

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:

bin.

A:


A:



A:


A:

4.3.8. Transport

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:



A:


A:

4.3.8.2. Shipment cost calculation and settlement

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

4.3.9. Billing

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.



A:


A:


A:



A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

adjustments)?

A:


A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?


A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:
4.3.9.2. Pro forma invoice processing

Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

4.3.10. Output

Questions:


A:




A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.3.11.1. Evaluation: Logistics Information System

Questions:


A:




A:

4.4. Cash Sales/Rush Order Handling
4.4.1. Sales Order
4.4.1.1. Rush Order Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:

documents?

A:

already?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:



A:



A:

date?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

output?

you want to print.

A:


A:

what are they?

A:


A:

materials?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

you need to show?

A:


A:

processes.

A:

Q: 34) Are there occasions when the delivery should be created at the same time as the
order (rush orders)?

A:

Q: 35) Do you price differently for rush orders?

A:

Q: 36) Should an availability check take place for rush orders?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.4.1.2. Cash Sales

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:

documents?

A:


A:


A:


A:



A:

date?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

output?

you want to print.

A:



A:

what are they?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

you need to show?

A:


A:

processes.

A:

Q: 30) Do customers, who order and pick up goods immediately, require a printed invoice
straight away (cash order)?

A:

Q: 31) Do you price differently for cash sales?

A:

Q: 32) How do you handle exception processing for cash sales (for example, if required
quantity is not found in warehouse)?

A:


Questions:


A:



A:

detail.

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


using batch jobs)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.4.3. Shipping

Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:



A:



A:

date?


A:


A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:



A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:

4.4.3.2. Picking

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

unit, etc.)?

A:


location?

A:


Questions:


A:


A:

units?


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:


A:

order?

A:


A:

system?

A:


A:

Q: 6) How do you record materials supplied by subcontractors?

A:

system?


A:



A:



A:



A:



A:


Questions:


A:

4.4.4. Billing

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:


A:



A:




A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

adjustments)?

A:


A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:
4.4.4.2. Pro Forma Invoice Processing

Questions:


A:



Questions:


A:


A:

4.4.4.4. Billing document cancellation

Questions:


A:


A:

4.4.5. Output

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:



A:

4.5. Third-Party Order Processing
4.5.1. Sales Order

Questions:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

4.5.1.2. Third-party Sales Order Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:

documents?

A:

already?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


A:



A:

date?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

output?

you want to print.

A:


A:

what are they?

A:


A:

materials?

A:


A:

Q: 18) Does your vendor directly deliver to your customers?

A:

Q: 19) Is this choice of selling goods material or order dependent?

A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


you need to show?

A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

detail.

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:

using batch jobs)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:

supply?

A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


Questions:

a


A:


A:


A:

Questions:

a


A:


A:


A:

Questions:

a



A:


A:


A:
4.5.4. Purchasing
4.5.4.1. Schedule Line (Schedule Agreement)

Questions:

scenario.)

A:


A:


release.

A:

4.5.4.2. Release Order

Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

ordering?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

documents?

A:


A:



A:



A:

purchased, etc)? o

A:



A:

4.5.4.4. Shipping Notification/Confirmation Processing

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


describe.

A:


A:



A:


Questions:


A:



A:


Questions:



A:


procedure

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:



A:


A:

have been received?

A:



A:



A:

on your order form?

A:


A:

Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:

explain.

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A:

Questions:



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No




A:



A:



A:


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

consumption/usage?

A:

of goods receipt?


A:


A:



A:


A:


Questions:

variances?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

price?


A:


A:




A:

necessary?


A:

system?

A:


Questions:



A:



A:



A:


A:

and your subsystem?


A:



A:

desired send time.


A:



A:


A:



A:


Questions:

receipts?

A:

the delivery?

A:


Questions:


A:



A:


Questions:


A:

X.

A:



A:


A:


A:

exceeded?

A:


le manager)


A:

4.5.7. Billing

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:


A:



A:




A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

adjustments)?

A:


A:


A:


output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:

Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

4.5.8. Output

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:



A:

4.6. Consignment Processing
4.6.1. Sales Order
4.6.1.1. Consignment Fill-up

Questions:


A:


A:



A:


A:

documents?

A:

already?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:

date?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

output?

you want to print.

A:


A:

what are they?

A:


A:

materials?

A:


A:

Q: 20) Does your vendor directly deliver to your customers?

A:

Q: 21) Is this choice of selling goods material or order dependent?

A:


A:

Q: 23) Do you allow customers to keep your material in stock while you retain ownership?


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

you need to show?

A:


A:

processes.

A:


A:

4.6.1.2. Consignment Issue

Questions:

Q: 1) What method will be used to determine when to bill the customer for consumed
material?

A:

Q: 2) How are you be notified when your customer has sold the product?

A:
4.6.1.3. Consignment Pickup

Questions:

Q: 1) Are unused or unwanted materials returned to your location from a consignment
location (consignment pickup)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you let customers place material back into consignment stock after it has been
issued? (Consignment Return Delivery Processing)

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) How do you issue empties/returnable packaging at your customer site?

A:


Questions:


A:


A:

detail.

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:

using batch jobs)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.6.4. Shipping
4.6.4.1. Delivery for Consignment Fill-up

Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:




A:



A:

date?

A:


A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:




A:


A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:



A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:


customers?

A:


A:


A:

4.6.4.2. Delivery for Consignment Issue

Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:



A:



A:

date?

A:


A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


on output?

you want to print.

A:



A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:


4.6.4.3. Delivery for Consignment Pickup

Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:



A:



A:

date?

A:


A:




A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:




A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:

4.6.4.4. Picking (Lean WM)

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

unit, etc.)?

A:


location?

A:


Questions:


A:


A:

units?



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

4.6.4.6. Goods Issue for Consignment Fill-Up

Questions:



A:

4.6.4.7. Goods Issue for Consignment Issue

Questions:




A:

4.6.4.8. Goods Receipt for Consignment Pick-Up

Questions:

Q: 1) Is a purchase order to be generated automatically as a reference document for
invoice verification in such cases?

Explanation: Automatic PO generation at the time of GR. Automatic PO generation at the
time of GR.

A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:



A:


A:


A:


A:



A:

4.6.5.1. Putaway Processing

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

(putaway).

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

with reference?

A:


A:



A:



A:



A:

created?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:

storage bins)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:

bin.

A:


A:



A:


A:


Questions:

receipt?

A:


A:


A:

4.6.6. Transport

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

4.6.7. Billing

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:


A:



A:



A:



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

adjustments)?

A:


A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:



delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:

Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

4.6.8. Output

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:



A:



A:

4.7. Intercompany Handling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you deliver products belonging to another subsidiary to customers?

A:

Q: 2) What are the allowable relationships between the subsidiaries?

A:

Q: 3) Are there internal costs charged between subsidiaries and how are they billed?

A:

Q: 4) Do you have to declare these internal costs to the authorities?

A:

4.7.1. Sales Order

Questions:


A:


A:


A:



A:

documents?

A:

already?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:

date?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

output?


you want to print.

A:


A:

what are they?

A:


A:

materials?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

you need to show?

A:


A:

processes.

A:



A:

4.7.2. Shipping

Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:



A:



A:

date?

A:



A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:




A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:



A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

unit, etc.)?

A:


location?

A:


Questions:


A:


A:

units?


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


Questions:



A:


Questions:

storage bins)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


Questions:

receipt?

A:


A:


A:

4.7.4. Transport

Questions:



A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

4.7.5. Billing

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:



A:



A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

adjustments)?

A:


A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:



A:

Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

4.7.6. Output

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:



A:

4.8. Sending Samples and Advertising Materials
4.8.1. Sales Order
4.8.1.1. Sending Samples and Advertising Materials

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:

documents?

A:

already?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:

date?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

output?

you want to print.

A:


A:

what are they?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:

you need to show?

A:


A:

4.8.2. Shipping

Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:



A:



A:

date?

A:


A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:



A:



A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:



A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

unit, etc.)?

A:


location?

A:


Questions:


A:


A:

units?


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:



Questions:



A:


Questions:


A:

4.8.3. Transport

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:

4.8.4. Billing
4.8.4.1. Billing Document for Free-of Charge Delivery

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:


A:




A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

adjustments)?

A:


A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:

Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

4.8.5. Output

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:



A:

4.9. Empties and Returnable Packaging Handling
4.9.1. Sales Order
4.9.1.1. Returnable Packaging Pickup

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:

documents?

A:


A:


A:

output?

you want to print.

A:

Q: 9) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like to
appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the

A:

what are they?

A:


A:

materials?

A:

Q: 13) Do you let customers place material back into consignment stock after it has been
issued? (Consignment Return Delivery Processing)

A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:

you need to show?

A:


A:

Q: 21) How do you issue empties/returnable packaging at your customer site?

A:

4.9.1.2. Returnable Packaging/ Empties Issue

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:

documents?

A:


A:


A:


A:

output?

you want to print.

A:


A:

what are they?

A:


A:



A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

you need to show?

A:


A:

4.9.2. Shipping
4.9.2.1. Delivery for Returnable Packaging Issue

Questions:



A:

from?

A:




A:



A:



A:

date?

A:


A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:



A:



A:


A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:



A:


A:

rules?


A:




A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:

4.9.2.2. Delivery for Returnable Packaging Pickup

Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:



A:




A:

date?

A:


A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:



A:



A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:



A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:

4.9.2.3. Goods Issue from Returnable Packaging Stock

Questions:



A:

4.9.2.4. Goods Receipt Processing for Returnables and Empties

Questions:


time of GR.

A:


Questions:


A:

4.9.3. Transport

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:

4.9.4. Billing
4.9.4.1. Billing Returnable Packaging

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:


A:



A:




A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

adjustments)?

A:


A:


A:

output?


want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:

Questions:


A:


A:

4.9.5. Output


Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:



A:

4.10. Complaints Processing
4.10.1. Complaints
4.10.1.1. Returns Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your returns processing in detail.

A:

Q: 2) List the reasons for creating returns.

A:

Q: 3) Do your returns need to go through an approval process? If so, describe your
approval process in detail.

A:

Q: 4) Are returns linked to previous documents (e.g. order, invoice)?

A:

Q: 5) Do you accept returns on all materials? If not, which materials can not be returned
and why?

A:

Q: 6) To which type of stock will the product be placed on return (for example: inspection,
unrestricted, quality, blocked)?

A:

4.10.1.2. Processing Credit/Debit Memo Request

Questions:

Q: 1) Do your debit and credit notes (memos) need to go through an approval process? If
so, describe it.

A:

Q: 2) Are credit/debit notes linked to previous documents (for example, orders, invoices)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 3) What types of adjustments are made in memos?

A:
4.10.1.3. Invoice Correction Request

Questions:

so, describe it.

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:
4.10.2. Shipping
4.10.2.1. Delivery for Returns

Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:




A:



A:

date?

A:


A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:




A:


A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:



A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:

4.10.2.2. Goods Receipt Processing for Returns

Questions:


time of GR.

A:

4.10.3.1. Stock Placement Processing of Returns

Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

(putaway).


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

with reference?

A:


A:


A:



A:



A:

created?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


bin.

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:

receipt?

A:


A:


A:

4.10.4. Shipment

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:

4.10.5. Billing
4.10.5.1. Credit Memo from Customer Complaint / Returns

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:


A:



A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

adjustments)?

A:


A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:

Questions:


A:


A:

4.10.6. Output

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:



A:

4.11. Rebate Processing
4.11.1. Rebate Agreements
4.11.1.1. Condition Processing

Questions:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

values)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

"lowest" price?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

production?

A:


A:


A:

values)?

A:


A:

the material?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 31) Do all the variants of a generic article have different sales prices?

A:

Q: 32) If so, do the sales prices of the generic article variants differ in only a few cases?

A:

Q: 33) Does the sales price of a structured article (set, prepack, display) result from adding
together the individual sales prices and including a markup, or is the sales price determined
using a different calculation rule?

A:


Q: 34) Can conditions be created as copies of existing conditions?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 35) Ares sales conditions to be adopted from other systems or other R/3 systems (such
as the end consumer prices suggested by the manufacturer)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 36) If you work in the wholesale area: Do you wish to overwrite conditions determined in
sales or store orders stemming from master records with e.g. end consumer prices and use
them for subesequent documents?

Explanation: After log end documents = e.g. delivery note or invoice

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

Q: 38) Do all the variants of a generic article have the same purchase prices (or can they
have different purchase prices)?

A:

4.11.2. Rebate Settlement
4.11.2.1. Credit Memo Request for Rebate Settlement

Questions:

so, describe it.

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.11.2.2. Rebate / Commission Calculation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How often do you reimburse the customer for their rebates - weekly, monthly,
quarterly or yearly?

A:

Q: 2) How are reimbursements made?


A:

Q: 3) Will you need to apply rebates to previous sales orders retroactively?

A:

Q: 4) Describe how you approve credit memos.

A:

Q: 5) Do you allow partial settlements for rebates? How do you handle them?

A:

4.11.2.3. Rebate Credit Memo

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:


A:




A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

adjustments)?

A:



A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:
4.12. Foreign Trade Processing
4.12.1. Legal Control
4.12.1.1. Monitoring of Legal Control Regulations

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to check for the export license at delivery time, or when you create the
sales order and the delivery?


A:

Q: 2) Which license types (for example, individual export licenses) do you need in the legal
controls that apply to you (for example, foreign trade law)?

A:

Q: 3) Define the legal regulations you need for each country.

A:

Q: 4) Is the export license specific to a certain destination country?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Is the export license specific to a certain customer?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Is the export license specific to a certain sales transaction type?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) Is the export license specific to a certain type of product?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 8) Is the export license limited by a quantity amount?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 9) Is the export license limited by a monetary amount?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.12.2. Declarations to the Authorities
4.12.2.1. Declarations to the Authorities

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for EU?

A:

Q: 2) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for Japan?

A:


Q: 3) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for NAFTA?

A:

Q: 4) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for Switzerland?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

4.12.3. Communication/Print
4.12.3.1. Output Transmission for Foreign Trade Documents

Questions:


A:


A:


A:

5. Inventory Management, Warehouse Management
and Transportation

Questions:

Q: 1) Who owns the inventory? To whom are the costs of managing the inventory
allocated?

A:

Q: 2) At which level do you valuate material (for example, company level, plant level)?

A:

Q: 3) Where do you want to be able to analyze the inventory balance sheet?

A:

Q: 4) How does material move between plants?

A:

Q: 5) Do you use pallet identification for production supply?

A:


Q: 6) Do you use picking and packaging functions with scanners (radio frequency)?

A:

Q: 7) Do you prepare raw materials for a production order on a scale and do you have to
ensure that exactly this material combination is used in the order?

A:

5.1. Goods Movements
5.1.1. Reservation
5.1.1.1. Reservation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific material reservations (for sales, for production) for your
stock materials?

A:

Q: 2) How far in advance are materials to be allowed to be reserved?

A:

Q: 3) In which cases would you want to use manual reservations?

A:

Q: 4) How long after the reservation date are open reservations canceled?

A:

5.1.2. Inbound Shipments

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

external carrier?

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

external carrier?

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

5.1.4. Goods Accepted

Questions:


A:


A:

postings?

A:



A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

(putaway).

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

with reference?

A:


A:


A:



A:



A:

created?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:

purge?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


production floor?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

5.1.5. Stck Transfers / Trans. Pstngs

Questions:


A:



Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:

bin.

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:

receipt?

A:


A:


A:



Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

5.1.6. Goods Issue

Questions:

storage bins)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:

system?


A:



A:



A:

do they contain?


A:


Questions:


storage bins)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:



A:

5.2. Physical Inventory & Cycle Counting
5.2.1. Physical Inventory
5.2.1.1. Specification of Cycle Counting Phys. Inv.

Questions:

Q: 1) Which materials do you count in cycles?

A:

Q: 2) Describe the cycle counting intervals. Specify plant, material, and interval.

A:

Q: 3) How are the ABC indicators to be assigned? - based on material consumption/usage -
based on material requirements - manually - other, please describe.

A:

5.2.1.2. Cycle Counting Phys. Inv. Preparation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you block the relevant stock during the physical inventory count?

Explanation: Setting of flag when creating physical inventory Setting of flag when creating
physical inventory

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you conduct a physical inventory for:

A:

Q: 3) Which types of physical inventory do you wish to use to count the materials in your
warehouses/stores?

Explanation: Linkage via ALE may be necessary Linkage via ALE may be necessary

A:
5.2.1.3. Determination of Scope for Periodic and Continuous Inventory

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you block the relevant stock during the physical inventory count?

Explanation: Setting of flag when creating physical inventory Setting of flag when creating
physical inventory

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you conduct a physical inventory for:

A:

warehouses/stores?


A:
5.2.1.4. Definition of Scope of Periodic Inventory

Questions:

warehouses/stores?


A:
5.2.1.5. Sample Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) For which assortment/material groups do you use the sample-based physical
inventory?

A:

Q: 2) At what level do you analyze the results of inventory sampling (merchandise category,
layout, etc.)

A:

Q: 3) Will you use random sample profiles when carrying out physical inventories of
materials?

A:

5.2.1.6. Printout of Physical Inventory Document

Questions:

Q: 1) How are physical inventory documents to be printed out?

A:

Q: 2) Are bar codes to be printed out on the physical inventory document?

A:

5.2.1.7. Inventory Count

Questions:


Q: 1) How do you carry out the physical inventory count (e.g. manually, using bar code
scanners)?

A:

5.2.1.8. Physical Inventory Analysis

Questions:

Q: 1) Are physical inventory differences aggregated at material group level?

A:

Q: 2) Do you allow physical inventory tolerances? Specify these tolerances.

A:

5.2.1.9. Post Inventory Differences

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for posting physical inventory differences? Specify the persons
responsible and the maximum differences allowed.

A:

5.2.2. WM Inventory
5.2.2.1. Storage Type Block

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you block any storage types for the purposes of physical inventory? Name the
storage types that are to be blocked.

A:

Q: 2) Choose the movement types you wish to block!

A:
5.2.2.2. Continuous Inventory WM

Questions:

Q: 1) What are the triggers for a continuous inventory?

A:

Q: 2) Do you carry out a continuous inventory in your warehouses/stores via zero stock
check?

A:

5.2.2.3. Annual Inventory WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Are goods movements blocked in full or in part in your warehouses/warehouse areas
for the duration of the annual inventory?


A:

Q: 2) Under what conditions are inventory entry and the stock placement process linked in
your warehouses/warehouse areas?

A:

Q: 3) Which inventory method do you use during stock placement?

A:

Q: 4) When do you conduct your annual physical inventory ?

A:

5.2.2.4. Cycle Counting WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Should the cycle-counting procedure be supported in your warehouses/stores?

A:


A:


A:

Q: 4) How is the ABC indicator to be assigned to the materials?

A:
5.2.2.5. Print Inventory List

Questions:

Q: 1) Which count procedure do you use for your branches to ensure that inventory data is
recorded in full?

A:

Q: 2) How do you carry out your physical inventory count? (e.g. manually, using bar code
scanners

A:

Q: 3) How many document items (each quant and storage bin counts as one item) do you
have in your physical inventory document?

A:

5.2.2.6. Enter Count Results

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you record the results of the physical inventory manually or electronically (e.g.
barcode scanner, radio-supported)?

A:

5.2.2.7. Start Inventory Recount

Questions:

Q: 1) Are recounts executed? If yes, which deviation tolerances have you set?

A:

5.2.2.8. Clear Differences WM

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you take account of conditions requiring subsequent (end-of-period)
settlement in your accounting system?

A:

5.3. Decentralized Warehouse Management
5.3.1. Inbound Shipments

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

external carrier?

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

external carrier?

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

5.3.3. Stck Transfers / Trans. Pstngs

Questions:

storage bins)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

5.3.4. WM Inventory
5.3.4.1. Storage Type Block

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you block any storage types for the purposes of physical inventory? Name the
storage types that are to be blocked.

A:


Q: 2) Choose the movement types you wish to block!

A:
5.3.4.2. Continuous Inventory WM

Questions:

Q: 1) What are the triggers for a continuous inventory?

A:

Q: 2) Do you carry out a continuous inventory in your warehouses/stores via zero stock
check?

A:

5.3.4.3. Annual Inventory WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Are goods movements blocked in full or in part in your warehouses/warehouse areas
for the duration of the annual inventory?

A:

Q: 2) Under what conditions are inventory entry and the stock placement process linked in
your warehouses/warehouse areas?

A:

Q: 3) Which inventory method do you use during stock placement?

A:

Q: 4) When do you conduct your annual physical inventory ?

A:

5.3.4.4. Cycle Counting WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Should the cycle-counting procedure be supported in your warehouses/stores?

A:


A:


A:


Q: 4) How is the ABC indicator to be assigned to the materials?

A:
5.3.4.5. Print Inventory List

Questions:

Q: 1) Which count procedure do you use for your branches to ensure that inventory data is
recorded in full?

A:

Q: 2) How do you carry out your physical inventory count? (e.g. manually, using bar code
scanners

A:

Q: 3) How many document items (each quant and storage bin counts as one item) do you
have in your physical inventory document?

A:

5.3.4.6. Enter Count Results

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you record the results of the physical inventory manually or electronically (e.g.
barcode scanner, radio-supported)?

A:

5.3.4.7. Start Inventory Recount

Questions:

Q: 1) Are recounts executed? If yes, which deviation tolerances have you set?

A:

5.3.4.8. Clear Differences WM

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you take account of conditions requiring subsequent (end-of-period)
settlement in your accounting system?

A:


Questions:


A:


A:

postings?

A:


A:


Questions:


A:

bin.

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:

receipt?

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

(putaway).

A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

with reference?

A:


A:



A:



A:



A:

created?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:

purge?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

production floor?


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

5.3.6. Goods Issue

Questions:

storage bins)?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

plant?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:




A:


A:


A:


A:

6. Customer Service

Questions:

Q: 1) For which types of products do you provide your services (products for private or
professional use)?

A:

Q: 2) Do you want to transfer the service history from your current system to SAP R/3?

A:

Q: 3) If yes, to which of these objects should the data be transferred?

A:

Q: 4) Do you consider one-time customers in your service processing?

A:

Q: 5) Which enterprise units are responsible for providing and executing services for a
specific piece of customer equipment?

A:

Q: 6) Do you employ service technicians in your company or do you operate a
straightforward call center?

A:

Q: 7) Is your customer service a proactive or reactive customer service?

A:

Q: 8) Is your customer service processing performed centrally or decentrally?

A:

Q: 9) Do you want to set up a workflow for the processing of notifications and/or orders?

A:

Q: 10) Is any part of your service organization outsourced (or will it be in the future)?

A:

Q: 11) Are certain services activities always performed by external contractors? If yes,
describe these types of services.

A:

Q: 12) Do you want to check the credit limit of your service customers during service
processing?

A:

6.1. Long-Term Service Agreements
6.1.1. Presales Activities
6.1.1.1. Mailing Campaign Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:

6.1.1.2. Customer Contact Processing

Questions:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

6.1.1.3. Service Contract Request Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:

Q: 4) Do you use different types of inquiry?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you use a reduced customer master record when you enter a new customer?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you want to combine inquiry processing with customer master data entry?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you process or evaluate RFQs in accordance with specific criteria?

A:

Q: 8) Do you enter RFQ items with different delivery dates?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Q: 9) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the RFQ?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the RFQ?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 11) How do you communicate with your customer?

A:

Q: 12) Which messages are issued during inquiries?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

6.1.1.4. Service Contract Quotation Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Q: 7) Do your customers require time and material quotations? (If yes, consider using
resource-related quotations.)

A:

Q: 8) Do you use different types of quotation?

A:

Q: 9) What kind of information is collected for quotations?

A:

Q: 10) Do you want to combine quotation processing with customer master data entry?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you enter a reason for the quotation?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you enter quotation items with different delivery dates?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 14) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the quotation?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 15) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter a quotation?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

Q: 17) How do you number quotations?

A:

6.1.2. Service Contract Processing
6.1.2.1. Service Contract Completion and Processing

Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:

contract?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No


A:


A:

Q: 14) Do you have long-term service agreements with your customers (for example to
perform preventive maintenance on your customer equipment periodically)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 15) If so, please describe the different types of service contracts that you offer to your
customer (for example differentiation by validity period or type of service).

A:

Q: 16) Can your customer choose between different contract options (for example, 24h
versus 12h response times)? List all options available for the different contract types.

A:

Q: 17) Will the contract options selected by the customer influence the pricing of the service
contract? If so, please describe the criteria influencing the price.

A:

Q: 18) Do you have contract-specific price agreements with your customers, and if so, what
do they look like (for example, the service contract with the customer covers all the spare
parts that are used during a service under the contract)?

A:

Q: 19) What technical objects are covered by the service contract item. Do you use one
service contract per piece of equipment, or does one service contract includes all the
customer's equipment?

A:

Q: 20) Do you want to assign maintenance plans to your customer maintenance contracts?

A:


Q: 21) Do you use resource-related billing for contracts? Describe when you would use this
functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting), service
management).

A:


A:

6.1.2.2. Service Contract Follow-Up Activity Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you perform follow-up activities when the service contract with the customer
expires?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) From the list, select the follow-up activities that you perform. If you select 'Other',
explain further.

A:

Q: 3) When do you start follow-up activities?

A:

6.1.2.3. Billing Request Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which department is responsible for billing the customer (for example, service
department, accounting department)?

A:

Q: 2) Do you already carry out resource-related billing? Do you use transaction VA90 in the
process?

Explanation: We recommend you create the billing request in resource-related billing using
transaction DP90 (in CS) or DP91 (in SD). Recommended procedure in the switch from VA90
to DP90/DP91: (1) Bill old orders to completion (2) Bill new orders with DP90/DP91 In certain
circumstandes, periodically billed orders require the use of a conversion program (for more
details, see the documentation or release notes for 4.5 and 4.6). release notes for 4.5 and
4.6).

A:

Q: 3) Do you bill your services at different percentage rates (for example, service hours at
100%, material at 50%)?

A:


Q: 4) Do you invoice the customer periodically for the service contract, and if so, how long
is the period?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 5) If you only invoice the customer once, what other criteria do you use to decide when
an invoice is sent to the customer (for example, operating time of equipment)?

A:

Q: 6) When do you create the invoices for the customer (for example, at the end of each
period, or on specific dates defined by the customer)?

A:

Q: 7) Does the customer receive one invoice per service contract, or is there one invoice for
several contracts?

A:

Q: 8) Is the invoice checked before being sent to the customer?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you need the detailed information from the CO line items or is it enough to bill
summarized CO totals records?)

Explanation: System performance is better when summarized CO totals records are billed.

A:

Q: 10) Which sales documents do you want to generated in resource-related billing?

Explanation: Dynamic Item Processor (DIP): If you are generating a debit memo request
only, positive and negative expenditures are cleared against each other. If a debit and credit
memo requests are being generated, positive and negative expenditures can be displayed
separately. displayed separately.

A:

Q: 11) Do you want further summarization of dynamic items during SD document
generation? If yes, what characteristics should be used for the summarization?

Explanation: Dynamic Item Processor (DIP): Required characteristics: object number,
transaction currency, units of measure Optional characteristics include cost element, activity
type, cost center A customer exit (Business Adin) is available for you to define your own
characteristics. characteristics.

A:


Q: 12) What characteristics should be used to determine the material?

Explanation: For example, determine materials using the cost center or a cost element/cost
center/activity type combination.

A:

Q: 13) From what sources can expenses originate?

Explanation: For example: actual costs, statistical key figures, or cash payments. You can
combine the sources. There is a customer exit you can use to define your own sources.
define your own sources.

A:

Q: 14) Do you want to define a particular default rate (in %) for particular sources of
expense requiring billing? If yes, define the sources and the relevant percentages.

A:

Q: 15) Do you use specific accounting indicators when confirming expenses (examples:
guarantees or grace periods)? If yes, which?

A:

Q: 16) What do the calculation motives affect?

Explanation: Defined authorization motives can be passed on to price determination.

A:
6.1.2.4. Billing Processing for Service Contract

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.



A:


A:


A:



A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

adjustments)?

A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?


A:


A:


A:
6.1.2.5. Service Contract Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do the service agreements with your customers include specific cancellation rules that
must be adhered to?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 2) If so, describe the cancellation process in detail.

A:

6.2. Call Center Processing
6.2.1. Front Office
6.2.1.1. Service Customer Contact Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you operate a "Telephony" call center or only a "Walk in" call center?

Explanation: "Walk in" Call Center: Your customer comes to you in person. "Telephony" Call
Center: Your customer can process their request with you over the telephone.

A:

Q: 2) Do you operate one or more call centers? How many queues are necessary?

Explanation: A "queue" is a part of the Call Center hierarchy.

A:

Q: 3) Which telephone infrastructure (private branch exchange, CTI) is/will be installed in
your company? Who is the manufacturer?

Explanation: Branch and CTI must be reconciled with one another. Each CTI requires a
particular telephony server as an interface between CTI and SAPphone.

A:

Q: 4) Do you already have a telephony server? If not, who creates or provides the
telephony server?

Explanation: The telephony server forms the necessary interface between your telephone
infrastructure and the SAP applications. It is delivered by some CTI manufacturers. (General
structure: PBX <-> CTI <-> Telephony server (interface) <-> SAPphone <-> CIC <-> R/3)

A:

Q: 5) Which CIC components are required to set up the CIC framework and in what order?

Explanation: The sequence supports the activities of the agent.

A:

Q: 6) Are the CIC standard components sufficient, or do individual customer components
have to be integrated or built?

A:

Q: 7) Is the set-up of a particular framework sufficient for all center employees (agents), or
should several frameworks be configured for particular agent groups?

Explanation: Several agents can use the same framework for the same or similar areas of
activity.

A:

Q: 8) Which business processes should your call center agents perform individually in your
company?

Explanation: Definition of all the transactions, which should be available, and their
arrangement on the screen (tabstrips).

A:

Q: 9) Which default information should be available in the individual entry fields for the
transactions?

A:

Q: 10) Which information should be copied from the business data display or set after the
business processes have been executed?

A:

Q: 11) Do you want to integrate access to HTML pages in your Front Office?

A:

Q: 12) Do you also want to be able to call up your customer contact activities from other
components or HTML pages (and not just using the Action Box pushbuttons)?

Explanation: A new approach was implemented for Release 4.6 which divides the Action Box
into a visible and an invisible part. The decoupled Action Box functionality enables you to
execute Action Box transactions without the visible Action Box tabstrip components. Action
Box transactions can also be called up from other visible components developed by the user
or from HTML pages (Internet, Intranet or customer-defined HTML pages) which are started
by transactions in the Action Box. Moreover, you can now also define a transaction in the
Action Box as a HTML session.

A:

6.2.2. Evaluations (Call Center)
6.2.2.1. Call Center Evaluations

Questions:

Q: 1) Which types of evaluations do you want from your Call Center? Describe.

A:

6.3. Spare Parts Delivery Processing
6.3.1. Presales
6.3.1.1. Mailing Campaign Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:

6.3.1.2. Customer Contact Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

6.3.1.3. Spare Parts Request Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:

Q: 4) Do you use different types of inquiry?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you want to combine inquiry processing with customer master data entry?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you process or evaluate RFQs in accordance with specific criteria?

A:

Q: 8) Do you enter RFQ items with different delivery dates?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the RFQ?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Q: 10) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the RFQ?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

Q: 12) Which messages are issued during inquiries?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

6.3.2. Service Notification
6.3.2.1. Service Notification Creation and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How is a customer call processed in your company? Please describe in detail the
different process steps.

Explanation: For example, the service request is first created in the system by the hotline,
which enters a description of the problem and then forwards the service request to to a
specialist in that area.

A:

Q: 3) What information do you require to process the call further (for example, service
contract number, service history of equipment)?

A:

Q: 4) Do you have customers located outside the time zone of your service center?

A:

single form?

A:

Q: 6) Do you want information about the reference object displayed automatically when a
notification is created? If yes, what information?

Explanation: Object information key

A:


Q: 7) How do you identify the technical objects, for which the customer requires the service
(for example, serial number, address)?

A:

Q: 8) How do you prioritize identified work?

A:

Q: 9) Select the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information you
will require to create the notification. Add other business partners to the list, if necessary.

A:

Q: 10) How do you describe a customer problem? Do you enter a verbal problem
description or do you use standardized codes, for example, to determine the damage, cause
of damage, or object parts?

A:

Q: 11) Do you want to link digitalized documents to notifications?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you allow your customers to enter their service requests directly in your system
using the Internet?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 13) How do you want to configure the interface for your notification with regard to control
data, breakdown data, activity data, and task data?

A:

Q: 14) Do you have standard tasks that you always perform for different types of customer
calls? If yes, describe them in detail.

A:

Q: 15) Are you restricted to a certain period of time, in which these tasks should be
executed?

A:

Q: 16) Do the service contracts that you have with your customers include agreements on
specific tasks with defined response time that you have to adhere to? If yes, describe them.

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 18) Should the person responsible for a task be informed automatically by the system?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 19) Do you want to set up an escalation workflow for notifications and tasks?

A:

standardized way (that is, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possible solutions
for a problem?

A:

communication?

A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



Questions:


A:


A:

6.3.3. Spare Parts Order
6.3.3.1. Spare Parts Quotation Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

6.3.3.2. Spare Parts Order Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:

documents?

A:

already?

A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:

date?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

output?

you want to print.

A:


A:

what are they?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:

you need to show?

A:

Q: 28) Are sales orders created with reference to a preceding document (inquiry,
quotation)?

A:

Q: 29) Are sales orders entered by the head office or stores?

A:

Q: 30) If the sales orders are entered by the stores, how are these transmitted to the central
retailing system?

A:

Q: 31) Where and how is subsequent processing initiated for a sales order?

A:

Q: 32) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the sales order?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 33) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the sales order?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 34) What triggers creation of a sales order?

A:


A:

Q: 36) Is the customer supplied with an order confirmation?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 37) Which scenarios do you use for sales order processing with regard to procurement
and shipping?

A:


Q: 38) Which types of order do you use?

A:

Q: 39) Do you carry out any special checks on sales orders for export?

A:

Q: 40) Do you process or evaluate sales orders in accordance with specific criteria?

A:

Q: 41) Can you also save incomplete sales orders? Under which conditions are these
processed further?

A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 45) Do you need to track your warranties?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 46) Which materials are provided with warranty agreements?

A:

Q: 47) How is it done today? Automatically or manually?

A:


A:


A:



A:


Questions:


A:


A:

detail.

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:

using batch jobs)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

6.3.5.1. Confirmation of Picking

Questions:


A:

bin.

A:


A:


A:


A:

6.3.5.2. Difference Processing During Picking

Questions:

receipt?

A:


A:


A:

Q: 4) How do you react to shortfall quantities (e.g. re-picking)?

A:

6.3.6. Delivery and Transportation
6.3.6.1. Monitoring of Legal Controls

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:

Q: 1) What triggers a goods issue?

A:

Q: 2) Who approves the goods issue? (You could use workflow to handle this process.)

A:


A:

Q: 4) Does delivery coincide with goods issue? (If so, consider the implications for the
process of delivery from projects.)

Explanation: It is possible to generate a delivery note without effecting the goods receipt. It is
also possible to combine these functions.

A:


A:


A:

Q: 7) Do service technicians have their own local stock (e.g. in their car) from which they
can take spare parts required for servicing?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:

order?

A:

Q: 11) Do service engineers have their own local stock (for example, in their car) from
which they take spare parts required for servicing?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

system?


A:



A:



A:


A:



A:


Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:



A:

date?

A:


A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:



A:


A:


rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

external carrier?

A:


A:


A:

6.3.7. Billing
6.3.7.1. Declarations to Authorities

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

6.3.7.2. Fixed Price Billing

Questions:



A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:


A:



A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

adjustments)?

A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:



columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:

Q: 23) Describe the different types of periodic billing that you use.

A:

Q: 24) Describe the billing process for these types of bills. Are they reviewed or approved
by project managers prior to being issued?

A:

Q: 25) Do you bill customers based on a schedule such as monthly, quarterly or some other
specified timing? (If yes, consider running the billing due list for projects according to this
schedule.)

A:

Q: 26) Is your billing based on milestones? (If yes, consider PS-milestone functions.)

A:

Q: 27) Milestone billing allows you to control a bill release on the project side. Who is
responsible for approving the draft invoice?

A:

Q: 28) Is your billing related to a specific delivery? (If yes, consider using a milestone to
control the release of invoices as deliveries are confirmed. Also consider structuring the
invoice so that it relates to the delivery schedule.)

A:

Q: 29) Is your billing based on fixed amounts or a percentage of order? (If yes, consider this
when structuring the billing plan in your project.)

A:

Q: 30) Is your billing based on the percentage of completion? (If yes, consider using
milestones to calculate the POC and to control billing).

A:

Q: 31) Is your billing based on percentage of completion? (If yes, consider using earned
value analysis milestone technique to calculate the percentage of completion and control the
billing.)

A:

Q: 32) Do you post actual revenues, discounts, or allowances to your project? (If yes,
consider the accounts and the implications for value categories in project reporting.)

A:

Q: 33) It is important to consider which items appear in a billing document and the
accounting treatment for them. Describe the accounting processes used for time and
material-related billing in your projects.

A:

6.3.8.1. Evaluations of Customer Service Information System [SMIS]

Questions:


A:



A:

6.4. Repairs Processing at Customer (Field Service)
6.4.1. Maintenance Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Note: For information about the maintenance plan, see documentation on master
data.

A:

6.4.1.1. Maintenance Plan Scheduling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you schedule your maintenance plans manually, or should the system perform the
scheduling automatically?

A:

6.4.1.2. Maintenance Call Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which objects should be generated for maintenance calls?

A:

Q: 2) Should scheduled orders be released automatically when they are created?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:



A:


A:


A:

single form?

A:




A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

using the Internet?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

executed?

A:



A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

for a problem?

A:

communication?

A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



Questions:

broken, damage, cause of damage) about a customer problem in order to create a service
history or to enable further evaluations?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


completed?

A:

have codes.

A:

6.4.2.4. Debit Memo Request Processing

Questions:

so, describe it.

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

Questions:


A:


A:

6.4.3. Service Order
6.4.3.1. Service Order Creation and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What different types of service do you provide (for example, preventive maintenance,
repair, installation)? List the service types and outline the differences in planning and
execution.

A:

single form?


A:

Q: 3) Mark in the following list whether services are performed by internal service
technicians and/or sub-contractors.

A:

Q: 4) When do you plan your service order; what information do you require from the
system with regard to labor resources (for example, availability of service technician, number
of people, duration of work)?

A:


A:

Q: 6) Do you want to define skills and/or qualifications for order operations?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you ever have more than one service technician working on the same service?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


A:

Q: 11) Do you provide the service technicians who perform a service with a list of individual
activities (task list)?

A:

Q: 12) Do you use pre-defined task lists in order planning?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

Q: 14) How do you manage the spare parts required for the service? For example, who
plans the required parts, how will the spare parts arrive at the customer?. Describe the
process in detail.

A:


A:

phase?

A:

created?


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:

Q: 22) At which level do you schedule work (for example, for a shift, crew, skill, qualification,
or an individual person and so on)?


A:

Q: 23) How exact is your scheduling (for example, usage backlog, capacity evaluation,

A:

communication?

A:

Q: 25) Do you sell service products for a fixed price?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 26) Do you want to use the service order as the basis for creating quotations for your
customers?

A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

phase?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:

6.4.3.3. Service Order Permit

Questions:


A:



A:

6.4.3.4. Service Order Release

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you decide that a service is ready to be performed? If necessary, differentiate
by service type. Is this decision a separate process step, and who makes the decision?

A:

6.4.3.5. Service Order Printing

Questions:


A:




A:

Q: 4) Do you send certain external documents to the customer (for example, an order
confirmation)?

A:

6.4.3.6. Service Order Execution

Questions:


Q: 1) Note: This process is only for service activities performed manually on technical


A:



A:



A:


Questions:


A:

reports.)

A:


A:


A:

projects)?



A:


A:

Questions:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Records (Splits)".

A:


A:


A:
6.4.5. Goods Movements

Questions:


A:


A:



A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

order?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

system?


A:



A:



A:


A:



A:

6.4.6. Service Product Order
6.4.6.1. Service Product Order Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:



A:

documents?

A:

already?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:

date?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

output?


you want to print.

A:


A:

what are they?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


A:


A:

you need to show?

A:

quotation)?

A:


A:

retailing system?

A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

and shipping?

A:


A:


A:


A:

processed further?

A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

detail.

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

using batch jobs)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:

bin.

A:


A:


A:



A:


Questions:

receipt?

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:

detail.

A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

using batch jobs)?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

6.4.9.2. Monitoring of Legal Controls

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:


A:


A:




A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

order?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

system?


A:




A:



A:


A:



A:


Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:




A:

date?

A:


A:



A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:



A:



A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:



A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

external carrier?

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


using CATS.

A:


A:

Q: 3) How does the service technician confirm the activities that are executed at the
customer (for example, a service report on paper, over the Internet and so on)?

A:

Q: 4) At which intervals (e.g., monthly or weekly) and on which level (e.g., one report per
engineer or one report per engineer/customer/equipment) will the service enginee r report
back the activities he has performed?

A:

number?


A:



A:



A:




A:


transaction IW41.

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:



A:

confirmations?


A:



A:

Q: 16) Do you post trip costs for the service technician to the service order, so that they
show up in the service order cost report and/or can be invoiced to the customer?

A:


Questions:


A:



A:



A:


A:


Questions:



A:



A:


Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A:


A:

today.


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

timesheets?

A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


Questions:

services?


A:

your employees.

A:


A:



A:

6.4.10.5. Forwarding of Time Sheet Data to CS

Questions:

sheet?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:


Questions:


A:



A:



A:

component?


A:

variants.)

A:


Questions:

service provider?

A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


completed?

A:

have codes.

A:


Questions:


A:

measurement range?

A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:

Q: 2) How do you want to settle service orders in general?

A:


A:

detail?

A:

Q: 5) Do you analyze the profitability of single service contracts, including all related service
costs and service revenues?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you intend to have service profitability analysis or profit center analysis within your
company?

A:

Q: 7) If you have a profitability analysis, how is this structured?

A:


Questions:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:



A:

6.4.11.5. Historical Service Order - Entry

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you create historical orders to track service work, which has already been
completed?

A:

6.4.12. Billing

Questions:


A:

process?

4.6).

A:


A:

is the period?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

several contracts?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:



A:



A:




A:


A:


A:



A:
6.4.12.2. Resource-Related Billing

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:



A:



A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


adjustments)?

A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:


Q: 23) Do you bill customers on a time and material basis? (If yes, consider using resource-
related billing.)

A:

Q: 24) Do you bill internal labor at an hourly, daily rate etc? (If yes, you need to enter the
activity types in Customizing for expense-related billing.)

A:

Q: 25) Describe the different ways that labor and expense are billed for your projects e.g. is
labor billed at fixed billing rates, or as a straight cost plus a markup, or a combination of both,
etc.

A:

Q: 26) Describe your billing process. How often are time and material invoices issued?

A:


A:

Q: 28) What is the relationship between activities reported against a project and activities
billed to the customer?

Explanation: If there is a difference, consider how the price list is used in SD or how a user
exit determines a price.

A:

Q: 29) If subcontractors are used, are they billed as an expense or as internal labor?

A:

Q: 30) Do you use time and material-related billing? Do you exclude some expenses from
projects from billing?

A:

Q: 31) Are the time and materials cost marked up in price for billing?

A:

Q: 32) Do you have caps on time and material billed?

A:


Q: 33) If so, describe the way caps are applied e.g. on the total of labor and expense, on
specific expenses etc.

A:

Q: 34) Is there an approval process for these project invoices? (If yes, consider using
workflow and involving the project manager in the process.)

A:

Q: 35) Do you show detailed info in the invoice for time and material-related billing?
Provide us with examples. (If yes, consider using project reports to support the detail
required.)

A:


A:


Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:


A:



A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


adjustments)?

A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

schedule.)

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

billing.)

A:


A:



A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:



A:

6.5. Repairs Processing in Service Center (Inhouse)

Questions:



A:


A:


A:

single form?

A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

using the Internet?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

executed?

A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

for a problem?

A:

communication?

A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No



Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


completed?

A:

have codes.

A:


Questions:


A:


A:

6.5.2. Customer Complaint
6.5.2.1. Creation and Processing of Quality Notifications

Questions:

Q: 1) In your company, who is responsible for the receipt or creation of quality notifications?

Explanation: Call center organizational unit etc.?

A:

Q: 2) In your company, who is responsible for processing the quality notifications that have
been created?

Explanation: Coordination

A:

Q: 3) Do you want a simplified view of the structure and functions of a notification to
facilitate ease of use for occasional users?

Explanation: Create simplified notification type for transaction IQS21.

A:

Q: 4) Which main criteria do you want to use to differentiate notifications? Will you want to
use different notification types?

Explanation: Background: A customer may want to use the same notification types, for
example, customer complaint in different plants or according to different criteria.

A:

Q: 5) Do you want to create notifications using copy models?

Explanation: Customizing: Define initial screens for notifications.

A:

Q: 6) How do you prioritize incoming notifications (complaints, queries and so on)?

Explanation: For example: "Very high", "high" etc.

A:

Q: 7) Do you define specific periods of time for processing notifications?

Explanation: Processing period for specific notification priorities.

A:

Q: 8) List the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information you
require when creating the notification. Add other business partners, if necessary.

Explanation: Partner definition.

A:


Q: 9) How do you describe the problem? Do you use a verbal description or standard
codes?

Explanation: Coding: Definiton of catalog profile

A:

Q: 10) Do you want to use specific catalogs for each material in notification processing?

Explanation: Warning: Definition of catalog profile in material master: If necessary, provide a
structure according to material type, since material-specific catalogs increase the amount of
data to be maintained (such as catalogs etc.). (such as catalogs etc.).

A:

Q: 11) Do you want to attach electronic documents (for example, inspection reports) to the
notification?

Explanation: Linking of quality notifications to the Document Management System.

A:


Explanation: Note: An incorrect assignment is usually the result of a problem with the
documentation.

A:

Q: 13) Do you have ad-hoc tasks that you always carry out for different notification types or
priorities? If so, describe these tasks.

Explanation: Definiton of response profiles.

A:

Q: 14) Do you want the person or coordinator responsible for a task to be notified
automatically by the system?

Explanation: User-based workflow definition or definition using HR reporting structure.

A:

Q: 15) Do you want newly created notifications to be subject to an additional approval
procedure?


Explanation: Set the "approval required" indicator for the required notification type (IMG
activity: OLQN_CL). An additional notification status "Submit for approval" will be created. be
created.

A:

Q: 16) How do you want to structure the layout of your notification with regard to the
problem description, execution, items, tasks, activities?

Explanation: Note: This applies to all notification types (Q1,Q2,Q3 etc.).

A:

Q: 17) Do you want to advise your employees of "related notifications" during notification
processing?

Explanation: Setting of screen group 025 "Related notifications".

A:

Q: 18) Do you want to allow or prevent certain procedures based on business
processes/events?

Explanation: Definiton of user status.

A:

Q: 19) Do you record costs arising from complaints? Describe how you record these.

Explanation: Costs, for example, for wages, material, telephone costs, travel expenses etc.

A:

Q: 20) Do you want to create and activate the QM order, based on the notification? Where
are these costs to be settled?

A:

Q: 21) Which shop papers do you use to process notifications?

Explanation: Documents that are usually sent to the nofication addressee (such as
confirmation of receipt, interim notices, 8D reports).

A:

Q: 22) How many notifications do you receive each day or each year?

Explanation: Defining number ranges for notifications.


A:

standardized way (for example, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possible
solutions for a problem?

Explanation: Coding of tasks, items and activities.

A:

Q: 24) How is a quality notification processed in your company? Describe the process for
external or internal notifications.

Explanation: Designing action box with sequential processing.

A:

Q: 25) Do you allow your customers to create complaints in your system using the Internet?

A:

6.5.3. Repair Order
6.5.3.1. Service Quotation Processing

Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

6.5.3.2. Repair Order Processing

Questions:



A:


A:


A:


A:

documents?

A:

already?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:



A:


date?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

output?

you want to print.

A:


A:

what are they?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:

you need to show?

A:

quotation)?

A:


A:

retailing system?

A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

and shipping?

A:


A:


A:


A:

processed further?

A:


A:


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:

reports.)

A:


A:


A:

projects)?


A:


A:

Questions:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Records (Splits)".

A:


A:


A:
6.5.5. Goods Movements
6.5.5.1. Goods Receipt Processing for Serviceable Material

Questions:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:



A:


A:




A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

consumption/usage?

A:

of goods receipt?


A:


A:


A:


A:

6.5.5.2. Goods Issue Processing for Returnable Material

Questions:


A:


A:


A:




A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

order?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

system?


A:




A:



A:


A:



A:

6.5.5.3. Goods Issue Processing for Serviceable Material

Questions:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:



A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

order?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

system?


A:



A:



A:



A:



A:

6.5.5.4. Goods Receipt Processing for Returnable Material

Questions:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:




A:


A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

consumption/usage?

A:

of goods receipt?


A:


A:


A:


A:

6.5.6. Service Order
6.5.6.1. Service Order Creation and Processing

Questions:


Q: 1) What different types of service do you provide (for example, preventive maintenance,
repair, installation)? List the service types and outline the differences in planning and
execution.

A:

Q: 2) How often do you visit the customer for the different service types per month/year?

A:

single form?

A:

Q: 4) Mark in the following list whether services are performed by internal service
technicians and/or sub-contractors.

A:

Q: 5) When do you plan your service order; what information do you require from the
system with regard to labor resources (for example, availability of service technician, number
of people, duration of work)?

A:


A:

Q: 7) Do you want to define skills and/or qualifications for order operations?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you ever have more than one service technician working on the same service?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:



A:

Q: 12) Do you provide the service technicians who perform a service with a list of individual
activities (task list)?

A:

Q: 13) Do you use pre-defined task lists in order planning?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

Q: 15) How do you manage the spare parts required for the service? For example, who
plans the required parts, how will the spare parts arrive at the customer?. Describe the
process in detail.

A:


A:

phase?

A:

created?


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


Q: 21) How do you plan special tools, documents and so on, which are required to execute
service activities?

A:


A:


A:

Q: 24) At which level do you schedule work (for example, for a shift, crew, skill, qualification,
or an individual person and so on)?

A:

Q: 25) How exact is your scheduling (for example, usage backlog, capacity evaluation,

A:

communication?

A:

Q: 27) Do you sell service products for a fixed price?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 28) Do you want to use the service order as the basis for creating quotations for your
customers?

A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:



A:

phase?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:

6.5.6.3. Service Order Permit

Questions:


A:



A:

6.5.6.4. Service Order Release

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you decide that a service is ready to be performed? If necessary, differentiate
by service type. Is this decision a separate process step, and who makes the decision?

A:

6.5.6.5. Service Order Printing

Questions:


A:





A:

Q: 4) Do you send certain external documents to the customer (for example, an order
confirmation)?

A:

6.5.6.6. Service Order Execution

Questions:

Q: 1) Note: This process is only for service activities performed manually on technical


A:



A:



A:


Questions:


A:


A:


detail.

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

using batch jobs)?


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:

bin.

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:

receipt?

A:


A:


A:


A:



Questions:



A:

from?

A:



A:



A:



A:

date?

A:


A:




A:

costs)?

automatically.

A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

on output?

you want to print.

A:




A:


A:

rules?


A:



A:

customers?

A:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

road, rail, sea?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

external carrier?

A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:


using CATS.

A:


A:

Q: 3) How does the service technician confirm the activities that are executed at the
customer (for example, a service report on paper, over the Internet and so on)?

A:

Q: 4) At which intervals (e.g., monthly or weekly) and on which level (e.g., one report per
engineer or one report per engineer/customer/equipment) will the service enginee r report
back the activities he has performed?

A:

number?


A:



A:



A:



A:


transaction IW41.


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:



A:

confirmations?


A:


A:

Q: 16) Do you post trip costs for the service technician to the service order, so that they
show up in the service order cost report and/or can be invoiced to the customer?

A:


Questions:


A:



A:



A:


A:


Questions:



A:



A:


Questions:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:


A:


A:


A:

today.


A:


A:


A:



A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

timesheets?

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


Questions:

services?


A:

your employees.

A:


A:



A:

6.5.10.5. Forwarding of Time Sheet Data to CS

Questions:

sheet?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:


Questions:



A:



A:



A:

component?


A:

variants.)

A:


Questions:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


completed?

A:


have codes.

A:


Questions:


A:

measurement range?

A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:


Questions:


A:

Q: 2) How do you want to settle service orders in general?

A:


A:

detail?

A:

Q: 5) Do you analyze the profitability of single service contracts, including all related service
costs and service revenues?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you intend to have service profitability analysis or profit center analysis within your
company?

A:

Q: 7) If you have a profitability analysis, how is this structured?

A:


Questions:


A:


A:


Questions:


A:


A:



A:

6.5.11.5. Historical Service Order - Entry

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you create historical orders to track service work, which has already been
completed?

A:

6.5.12. Billing
6.5.12.1. Credit Memo Request Processing

Questions:

so, describe it.

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:

Questions:


A:

process?

4.6).

A:


A:

is the period?

A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A:

several contracts?

A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No



A:



A:



A:



A:




A:


A:


A:



A:
6.5.12.3. Resource-Related Billing

Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:



A:



A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


adjustments)?

A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:


Q: 23) Do you bill customers on a time and material basis? (If yes, consider using resource-
related billing.)

A:

Q: 24) Do you bill internal labor at an hourly, daily rate etc? (If yes, you need to enter the
activity types in Customizing for expense-related billing.)

A:

Q: 25) Describe the different ways that labor and expense are billed for your projects e.g. is
labor billed at fixed billing rates, or as a straight cost plus a markup, or a combination of both,
etc.

A:

Q: 26) Describe your billing process. How often are time and material invoices issued?

A:


A:

Q: 28) What is the relationship between activities reported against a project and activities
billed to the customer?

Explanation: If there is a difference, consider how the price list is used in SD or how a user
exit determines a price.

A:

Q: 29) If subcontractors are used, are they billed as an expense or as internal labor?

A:

Q: 30) Do you use time and material-related billing? Do you exclude some expenses from
projects from billing?

A:

Q: 31) Are the time and materials cost marked up in price for billing?

A:

Q: 32) Do you have caps on time and material billed?

A:


Q: 33) If so, describe the way caps are applied e.g. on the total of labor and expense, on
specific expenses etc.

A:

Q: 34) Is there an approval process for these project invoices? (If yes, consider using
workflow and involving the project manager in the process.)

A:

Q: 35) Do you show detailed info in the invoice for time and material-related billing?
Provide us with examples. (If yes, consider using project reports to support the detail
required.)

A:


A:


Questions:


A:



A:

describe in detail.


A:


A:


A:



A:



A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


A:


adjustments)?

A:


A:

output?

want to print.

A:


delete columns.

A:


columns.

A:

review)?

A:

number)?

A:


A:


A:



A:


A:

schedule.)

A:


A:


A:


A:


A:


A:

billing.)

A:


A:



A:


Questions:


A:


A:


A:


A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No


Questions:


A:



A:

Requirement Gathering Questions for Maintenance Notification and Order Processing

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Requirement Gathering Questions for Maintenance Notification and Order Processing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Requirement Gathering Questions

1.1.1.1. Task Definition

You might also like